What is Electronic Chart Display

and Information System (ECDIS)?

The Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) is a

development in the navigational chart system used in naval vessels and ships.

With the use of the electronic chart system, it has become easier for a ship’s

navigating crew to pinpoint locations and attain directions.

ECDIS complies with IMO Regulation V/19 & V/27 of SOLAS convention as

amended, by displaying selected information from a System Electronic

Navigational Chart (SENC). ECDIS equipment complying with SOLAS

requirements can be used as an alternative to paper charts. Besides

enhancing navigational safety, ECDIS greatly eases the navigator’s workload

with its automatic capabilities such as route planning, route monitoring,

automatic ETA computation and ENC updating. In addition, ECDIS provides

many other sophisticated navigation and safety features, including continuous

data recording for later analysis.

The ECDIS utilises the feature of the Global Positioning System (GPS) to

successfully pinpoint the navigational points. It also has to be noted that the

ECDIS adheres to the stipulations set by the International Maritime

Organisation, and thus it adds to the trustworthiness of the electronic chart

system. ECDIS is basically a navigational information system, interfaced with

other navigational equipments such as the GPS, Gyro, RADAR, ARPA, Echo

Sounder etc.

ECDIS also incorporates and displays information contained in other nautical

publications such as Tide Tables and Sailing Directions and incorporates

additional maritime information such as radar information, weather, ice

conditions and automatic vessel identification.

Advantages of ECDIS over paper charts 

1. All information is processed and displayed in real time

2. It eases the process of passage planning

3. One can get all necessary navigational information at a glance

4. Alarms and indications are in place to indicate and highlight dangers

5. Chart correction is made easier in ECDIS as compared to paper charts

6. Charts can be tailored as per the requirement of the voyage

7. Other navigational equipments such as the AIS, ARPA etc can be

overlayed and integrated

8. Charts can be oriented as per requirement

9. With the facility to zoom in and out, features can be examined as per

necessity

10. One can obtain a more accurate ETA

11. Charts can be interrogated for detailed information

12. All in all, it enhances the safety of navigation

Types of ECDIS charts

1. Raster Chart (RNC): RNCs are direct copy or a scan of the paper charts.

It looks identical to a paper chart as all the information shown is directly

printed. The chart only grows larger or smaller as per the zooming and

when rotated, everything rotates.

2. Vector Chart (ENC): ENCs are computer generated charts. The details

on an ENC can be turned on and off depending on the requirement of the

user. Objects on the ENC can be clicked for more details on the same.

Depths can also be monitored to obtain a warning with regard to

grounding. When zooming, the features grow large or small but the text

remains the same.

ECDIS covered under the following

1. SOLAS Chapter 5

2. Port State Control Requirements

3. IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS

4. S 52 Standard (Display Standard)

5. S 57 Standard (Compilation Standard)

6. S 63 Standard (IHO Data Protection/Encryption Standard)

ENC (Electronic Navigational Chart) Layers

 Display Base (No information can be deleted)

 Standard Display

 Full Display

 Custom Display

Minimum Interface Requirement

 Position Sensor

 Heading Sensor

 Speed Sensor

ECDIS Compliance

 Approved ECDIS with approved backup

 Type approved hardware

 Type approved software

 Approved installation

 Official Chart Services

 Training of Officers

Chart Updating

Updates to the ECDIS charts may reach the ship in various ways, depending

upon the capabilities of the service provider and the onboard communication

facilities.

 On data distribution media (DVD)

 As an email attachment (SATCOM)

 As a broadcast message via SATCOM plus additional communication

hardware

 As an internet download

Voyage Recording
 Minute by minute recording for the past 12 hours of the voyage

 Record of 4 hourly intervals of voyage track for a period of 6 months

Dual Fuel: Dual Fuel is the use of RNCs when ENCs are not available with

approved paper chart backup.

Alarms and/or Indication in ECDIS

Alarms

1. Exceeding cross track limits

2. Crossing selected safety contour

3. Deviation from the route

4. Critical Point Approach

5. Different datum from the positioning system

Alarms or Indication

1. Largest scale for alarm (present chart too small a scale)

2. Area with special conditions

3. Malfunction of ECDIS

Indication

1. Chart over scale (zoomed too close)

2. Larger scale ENC available

3. Different reference units

4. Route crosses safety contour

5. Route crosses specific area activated for alarms

6. System test failure

For ease of understanding, Indications may be either visual or audible

whereas Alarms must be audible and may be visual as well.

Power Supply

 It should be possible to operate ECDIS and all equipment necessary for

its normal functioning when supplied by an emergency source of

electrical power

 Changing from one source of power supply to another or any interruption

of supply for a period of upto 45 seconds should not require the

equipment to be manually re-initialized

Carriage Requirement

 Passenger Vessels > 500 GT

New Build – By July 2012

Existing Build – By 2014 (Built before 1 July 2012)

 Tankers > 3000 GT

New Build – By July 2012

Existing Build – By 2015

 Cargo Vessels > 10000 GT

New Build – By July 2013

Existing Build – By 2018 (Built before 1 July 2013)

 Cargo Vessels > 3000 GT

New Build – By July 2014

 Cargo Vessels > 50000 GT

Existing Build – By 2016

 Cargo Vessels > 20000 GT

Existing Build – By 2017

Limitations of ECDIS

1. The accuracy of the information received via AIS is only as good as the

accuracy of the AIS information transmitted. The same is applicable for

all other equipments interfaced with the ECDIS.

2. Position of ships received on ECDIS display might not be referenced to

WGS 84 datum

3. Over reliance on ECDIS for navigational safety should be avoided until it

is confirmed that all the data transmitted, received and displayed are

accurate

4. Users must be aware that any erroneous information is detrimental to the

safety of own as well as other vessels

5. Some sensors might lack the integrity with regard to accuracy and those

that have not been tested

6. Not all ships are fitted with ECDIS and hence one cannot be sure of

technical ability with regard to positioning as well as navigation; the kind

that ECDIS provides

It is never prudent for the OOW to depend solely on the information on the

ECDIS. IT is only an aid to navigation and never replaces the human quotient

which brings in the skill and expertise with experience that an ECDIS can

never provide.

IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS

1. The primary function of ECDIS is to contribute to safe navigation

2. ECDIS with adequate back up arrangements may be accepted as

complying with the up to date charts required by Regulation V/20 of the

1974 SOLAS Convention

3. In addition to the general requirements for shipborne radio equipment

forming part of the GMDSS and for electronics navigational aids

contained in IMO Resolution A.694 (17), ECDIS should meet the

requirements of this performance standard

4. ECDIS should be capable of displaying all chart information necessary

for safe and efficient navigation originated by, and distributed on the

authority of government authorized hydrographic offices

5. ECDIS should facilitate simple and reliable updating of the electronic

navigational chart

6. ECDIS should reduce the navigational workload compared to using the

paper chart. It should enable the mariner to execute in a convenient and

timely manner all route planning, monitoring and positioning currently

performed on paper charts. It should be capable of continuously plotting

the ship’s position

7. ECDIS should have at least the same reliability and availability of

presentation as the paper chart published by the Government authorized

hydrographic offices.

8. ECDIS should provide appropriate alarms or indications with respect to

the information displayed or malfunction of the equipment

ECDIS Training

There are many institutes that conduct the ECDIS course. It is usually a 5

days extensive course for which candidates must have completed a year at

sea as a Deck Cadet. Every institution has a different price range for the

course and that must be checked on the institute’s website itself. The institute

must also be checked for approval from the respective governing body of a

country (e.g. DG Shipping for India). With more and more ships inculcating

ECDIS into their system, the knowledge, skill and understand of ECDIS

should be emphasized on. The same is achieved via simulators during the

tenure of the course. Almost all institutes also put the possession of a ROC

ARPA certificate of proficiency as a prerequisite for entry into the ECDIS

course.

The concept of ECDIS is something that is gaining more and more popularity

in today’s times.  By adopting this electronic system of marking and charting

navigational routes, it has become easier to avoid any unwanted accidents as

the ship is dependent on modern technology rather than human aid.

Inspite of some criticism from a few industry players, it can be easily said that

ECDIS as an electronic Chart System is something that allows shipping

companies and ship owners a lot of mental freedom when it comes to the

safety of the vessel in the sea water by making ship navigation faster, simpler

and sleeker.

Introduction

What is ECDIS?

 A navigational electronic chart system is a general term of all electronic equipment that is
capable of displaying a vessel’s position on a chart image on a screen.

 There are two classes of navigational electronic chart systems.

The first is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System(ECDIS), which

meets IMO/SOLAS chart carriage requirements.

The second is an Electronic Chart System (ECS), which can be used to assist

navigation, but does not meet IMO/SOLAS chart carriage

requirements

ECDIS equipment is specified in the IMO ECDIS Performance Standards as follows:

 Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) means a navigation information

system which with adequate back up arrangements, can be accepted as complying with

the up-to-date chart required by regulation V/19 & V/27 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention.

Where the team ECDIS is used in this document, this is to be understood as those navigational
electronic

chart systems, which have been tested, approved and certified as compliant with the IMO ECDIS

Performance Standards and other relevant IMO Performance standards and thus is compliant with

SOLAS ECDIS requirements.

ECS

ECS is specified in ISO 19379 as follows:

ECS is a navigation information system that electronically displays vessel position and relevant
nautical

chart data and information from an ECS Database on a display screen, but does not meet all the IMO

requirements for ECDIS and is not intended to satisfy the SOLAS Chapter V requirements to carry a

navigational chart.

Background and purpose

ECS equipment ranges from simple hand held GPS enabled devices to sophisticated stand-alone

computer equipment interfaced to ship systems.

The 1974 International Convention for the safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS 1974, subsequently amended
in

2000 and 2002, specifies the requirements for the navigational equipment to be used onboard ships
entitled to fly the flag of a party to the convention. This convention was adopted by the International

Maritime Organization (IMO), the United Nations Organization that is concerned with maritime

transportation.

IMO member states are obliged to adopt IMO rules and regulations into their national legislation.

However, only when the convention text has been incorporated into national legislation does it take

effect for the individual ships registered in that country. This process of incorporation into national

legislation may vary from a few months to several years.

The country is which a ship is registered and hence which flag it is flying is known as the Flag State. It
is

the national maritime administration representing the flag state, which controls the adherence to
the

SOLAS carriage requirements (Flag State Control).

The national maritime administration is also responsible for port state control. Ships arriving at a
port

may be subject to port state control by local officials based on flag state regulations and
international

agreements. Port states cooperate within regions to apply consistent standards for example the

European nations and Canada cooperate under the umbrella of the Paris Memorandum of
Understand

(MOU).

IMO Pertinent provisions

1.) SOLAS Chapter V

o Regulation 2, defines the nautical chart

o Regulation 19, specifies the equipment to be carried on different types of ships and

o Regulation 27, specifies the requirement to keep charts and publications up-to-date.

2.) STCW ‘95

3.) IMO Resolution A.817(19)

Applying the IMO Regulation

The nautical charts and nautical publications referred to in regulation V/2 are in short called

“official charts and publications”.

IMO SOLAS V2
 Nautical chart or nautical publication is a special purpose map or book, or a specially

compiled database from which such a map or book is derived, that is issued officially by

or on the authority of a government, authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant

government institution and is designed to meet the requirements of marine navigation.

IMO SOLAS V/19

Nautical charts and nautical publications to plan and display the ship’s route for the

intended voyage and to plot and monitor positions throughout the voyage; an

Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) may be accepted as

meeting the chart carriage requirements of this subparagraph;

Back-up arrangements to meet the functional requirements of subparagraph, if this

function is partly or fully fulfilled by electronic means;

An appropriate folio of paper nautical charts may be used as a back-up arrangement for

ECDIS. Other back-up arrangements for ECDIS are acceptable (see appendix 6

to a resolution A.817 (19), as amended).

IMO SOLAS V/27

Nautical charts and nautical publications, such as sailing directions, lists of lights, notices

to mariners, tide tables and all other nautical publications necessary for the intended voyage,

shall be adequate and up to date.

From the three regulations referred, the requirements for charts and publications to be carried can
be

fulfilled by

1.) Carriage of official and up-to-date paper charts, or

2.) Carriage of a type-approved ECDIS, using official and up to date Electronic Navigational

Charts (ENC) together with an appropriate back up arrangement.

The minimum carriage requirements for charts and publications are satisfied by the use of

paper products. After the amendment of SOLAS regulations 1 July 2002 it is allowed to replace

the paper charts and publications by electronic means if suitable back up is provided. Paper charts
and
publications continue to be the minimum requirements for back up purposes.

Principal Types of Electronic Charts

Raster and Vector Charts

Nautical charts can be disturbed in analogue form, as paper charts or digitally, as chart data in

raster or vector form, and are available from a variety of sources, both governmental and private.

A raster chart is basically just a scanned and passive image of a paper chart, where a vector chart

corresponds to a digital analysis by object (points, lines, areas etc.)

Official Charts

Charts issued by or on the authority of a government, authorized Hydrographic Office or other

relevant government institutions are official and may be used to fulfill carriage requirements
(provided

they are kept up to date).

 All other nautical charts are by definition not official and are often referred to as private

charts. These charts are not accepted as the basis for navigation under the SOLAS

convention

 There are two kinds of official digital charts commonly available; Electronic Navigational

Charts (ENC) and Raster Navigational Charts (RNC).

Electronic Navigation Chart (ENC)

ENC stands for “Electronic Navigational Chart”. The term was originally introduced for digital

chart data complying with the IHO chart data transfer standard S-57. By IMO definition ENCs can
only be

produced by or on the authority of a government authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant

government institution; however the term ENC is not protected and has been widely (and
incorrectly)

used by private organizations to refer to their own products. To avoid possible confusion the word

“official” has been used as a prefix to ENC in this document.

Official ENCs have the following attributes:

o ENC content is based on source data or official charts of the responsible Hydrographic Office.

o ENCs are compiled and coded according to international standards;

o ENCs are referred to World Geodetic System 1984 Datum (WGS84);

o ENC content is responsibility of the issuing Hydrographic Office;

o ENCs are issued only by the responsible Hydrographic Office; and

o ENCs are regularly updated with official update information distributed.

Electronic Chart System

What is ECS?

Ali system, which are not tested to show compliance with the ECDIS Performance Standards; can be

generically designated as “Electronic Chart Systems” (ECS). An ECS may be able to use either official

ENCs, RNCs or other chart data produced privately and could have functionality similar to ECDIS.

Some ECS equipment manufacturers also produce vector and raster data to use in their products.
These

suppliers have been producing private chart data for a number of years and have established

themselves in the market. They were the pioneers and have established the idea and the use of

electronic chart systems on vessels. Their charts are derived from hydrographic Office paper charts
or

Hydrographic Office digital data.

Hydrographic Offices do not take any responsibility for the accuracy or reliability of privately
produces

charts.

Where the vessel operates with ECS, the paper chart remains the official basis for navigation
onboard.

The vessel must retain and use a full folio of up-to-date paper charts onboard, regardless of the type
of

electronic charts used.

Because ECS is not intended to meet SOLAS requirements, there are no IMO Performance Standards
for

ECS.

Some ECS manufacturers also use the term RCDS to describe their systems. In the case the
manufacturer

is stating that the system uses RNCs and possibly that it has the same functionality as required by
the

ECDIS Performance Standards However, such systems cannot be used to meet carriage
requirements.
The STCW and ISM codes put the responsibility firmly on the ship owner to ensure that mariners on

their vessels are competent to carry out the duties they are expected to perform. If a ship has ECS
fitted,

the ship owner has a duty to ensure that users of such a system are properly trained in the operation

and use of electronic charts, are aware of the limitations compared to ECDIS and are familiar with
the

shipboard equipment before using it operationally at sea.

ECDIS Data

 It should be the aim of the presentation design and presentation standards to provide as much

diversity and flexibility as possible as long as the system remains simple and straightforward to

use. ECDIS flexibility of presentation may include:

 Displaying/removing various type of charts and non-chart information

 Selecting standard chart display or detailed display and simplified symbols or full symbols.

 Using cursor interrogation for further details

 Overlaying/removing radar video or radar target information

 Overlaying/removing various other sensor information

 Changing the scale or orientation of the display.

 Selecting the true motion or the relative motion

 Changing the screen layout

 Giving he navigation and chart warnings

 Graphical presentation of computer evaluation of grounding danger

 Graphical presentation of collusion danger

Alarms

ECDIS has an important capability of detecting the need for warnings and alarms. Here are some

examples of possible warnings:

o During route planning

o During route monitoring

o During sailing

Sensors

The ECDIS system is often connected to an Integrated Bridge System, or forms a apart of
Integrated Bridge System, a system where RADAR, ARPA, AUTOPILOT, POSITIONING(DGPS),
ROUTING,

LOG, GYRO and AIS.

Basic Navigational Functional Functions and Settings:

Automatic functions

Manual Functions

Own chart entries

Presentation of navigational marks

Additional information

Vector types

Automatic functions

Positions

Heading/Gyro

Course

Speed

Safety values and time

Manual Functions

o Cursor

o Electronic bearing line and Range rings

Route Planning with ECDIS

 Sea area selection

 Route planning information

 Construction of a route

 Adjustment of a planned route Curved track planning

 Planning notes

 Safety values

 Check for navigational safety

 Ultimate route

Four stages in planning a safe voyage

o Appraisal

o Planning

o Execution

o Monitoring

ROUTE MONITORING

 Monitored Area

 Required route

 Vector time

 Check measurements

 Look ahead function

 Alarms

 Current and wind

UPDATING

Apply updates and assess the importance of updating

1. Production and Distribution of Updates

 How the production of updates by national hydrographic services is performed.

 How the distribution of updates by regional data centers is organized and

executed.

2. Manual, Semi-automatic and Automatic Updating

 The essentials of manual, semi-automatic and automatic updating.

3. Performing Updates On-Board

 Performing the manual and semi-automatic updating procedures.

 Indicating how items which are added to, removed from or altered on the
regional ENC are marked and indicated.

 Displaying updates in order to:

 Review their contents and

 Ascertain that they have been

Production and Distribution

Source Provider (SP)

 An originator such as an originating HO (hydrographic office), or another

information source, such as local authority, providing warnings.

 SP extracts the electronic navigational chart data (ENCD) update information

from the electronic chart database (ECDB)

Issuing Authority (IA)

it is an entity assembly an ENC update data set from information provides from various sources,

responsible for setting up the transfer of the update set. By the definition, the IA is the issuer of the
ENC

to which the update applies. The IA under the WEND system is the Regional ENC coordinating
center.

Distributor

It is an entity responsible for packaging, repacking and % or disseminating and update set to all
users, or

group of users. It disseminates the ENC updates to receiver.

o Receiver supplies ENC updates to applier Usually the mariner on board the ship, or the telecom

receiver linked to the ECDIS.

o Applier is an entity controlling the application of the update information, e.g., Mariner keying in

update information, or the software inside the ECDIS automatically processing the ENC update

information.

Essential of Manual and Automatic Updating

Manual Updating It consist of a human operator entering information manually into the ECDIS,
usually

based on unformatted update information, that is not machine readable. However in order for the

ECDIS to accept manual updates, the update information must be entered in a structured way at
least

compatible with the relevant ECDIS standards.

Automatic Updating It consists of an updating process by which the updating information is applied

within the EDIS, to the SENC without operator intervention. All automatic updating requires the data
to

be formatted according to the relevant ECDIS standards.

4. Updating and safe navigation

 Realized that only cautiously updated data allow safe navigation.

5. Display and Function of Other Navigation information

 The display and possible dangers and the function of navigational information

6. Radar and Superimposition

 How radar superimposition is employed:

Assess the possible offsets of radar

Echoes of fixed charted objects from their charted position

7. Automatic Track Keeping

 How automatic track-keeping is employed: The

potential dangers of the automatic track-keeping mode

8. Use of Transponder
 The use of information from the transponder

There are three methods of automatic updating:

Inactive Updating is a method requires the interactive application of the textual Notice to Mariners.
The

operator determines the corrections from the notice. Then, using stool kit, he selects the symbol

appropriate to the correction required, identifies the location of the symbol, labor intensive and
subject

to operator error. It also clutters the screen display because it can be applied only as an overlay to
the

ENC data.

Semi-Automatic Updating is a method requires the operator to enter the correction data furnished
in

correct digital format the originating hydrographic office into the system via electronic medium. The

ECDIS then processes these corrections automatically and displays an update chart with the changed

data indistinguishable from the remaining original database.

Fully Automatic Updating the full automatic method of updating entry allows for a direct

telecommunications link to receive the official digital update and input it into the ECDIS. This process
is

completely independent of any operator interface. Internal ECDIS processing is the same as that of
semi-

automatic updating of the database.

9. Errors of Displayed Data

 The potential errors of displayed data and take proper action

10. Potential Errors of the ECDIS display due to:

 Inaccurate hydrographic data

 Poor resolution

 The shifting of buoys

11. Potential Errors in the display of own ship’s position

 That the potential errors introduced by:

o Inaccurate input of radar data

o Different geodetic co-ordinate systems

o Reference position of sensors onboard

12. Correctness of Displayed Data

 Check the correctness of displayed data:

o By comprising ECDIS and Radar Information

o By checking ME ship’s position by means of a second independent

position-fixing system

13. Errors of interpretation due to;

 The potential errors of interpretation and take proper action to avoid these

errors.

14. The Errors of interpretation due to;

 Different modes of vector stabilization

 Overscale of the display

 Neglecting the 95% probability of the accuracy standard of the fixing sensor

 Automatic track-keeping features such as the continuous display of own ship’s

position on the preplanned track.

 Difference between true north and gyro north (radar)

15. Avoid Errors of Interpretation by Verifying the selection

 Common reference system

 The appropriate scale

 The sensors best suited for the given situation

 The safety values

 Display catalogue

 Usage, etc.

16. Integrity Monitoring

 Analyze and assess the proper functioning of ECDIS

17. On-line Test

 The proceeding of the on-line test during booting

 The on-line system check during normal operation

18. Manual and Visual test

 Manual test of the major functions of hardware. MMI and sensors data

 Visual tests of chart data

19. On-line test

 The proceeding of the on-line test during booting

 The on-line system check during normal operation

20. Verifications of Proper Functioning

 Recognize and verify all status indications:

1. The proper functioning of the ECDIS display and the positioning-fixing system by comparing

the ECDIS and Radar objects or back-up positioning system.

2. That all received updates are contained in the ECDIS display.

3. Asses that the navigation is safe.

DISPLAY and FUNCTION OF OTHER NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION

Radar information or other navigational information may be added to the ECDIS display.

Particularly, radar superimposition and automatic track control. However, it should not degrade the

SENC information, and should be clearly distinguishable from the SENC information. CDIS and other

navigational information should use a common reference system. If this is not the case, an indication

should be provided.

RADAR

Transferred radar information may contain both the radar image and ARPA information. If the

radar image is added to the ECDI display, the chart and the radar image should both be adjusted

automatically for antenna offset from the conning position. It should be possible to adjust the
displayed

position of the ship manually so that the radar image matches the SENC display and also to remove
the

radar information by simple operator action.

TRANSPONDER

Transponder is an example of Automatic Identification System (AIS) which is an automatic

communication and identification system intended to improve the safety of navigation by assisting in

the efficient operation of vessel traffic services, ship reporting, ship-to-ship and ship-to-shore
operation.

Errors of Displayed Data

The potential errors on ECDIS displays are:

 Errors in the ECDIS data and display

 Errors in by sensor input

 Errors due to difficult reference systems

The potential errors of the ECDIS displays due to:

 Inaccurate hydrographic data

 Poor resolution
 The shifting of buoys

The potential errors in the display of own ship’s position may be introduced by:

 Inaccurate input from the electronic position-fixing system

 Inaccurate input of radar data

 Different geodetic co-ordinate systems

 Reference position of sensors on board

To the correctness of displayed data:

By comparing ECDIS and radar information

By checking the ship’s position by means of a second independent position fixing

system

Errors of Interpretation

The errors of interpretation are due to:

Different modes of vector stabilization

 Over scale of the display

 Neglecting the 95% probability of the accuracy standard of the fixing sensor

 Automatic track-keeping features

 Difference between true north and gyro north(radar0

To avoid of interpretation by verifying the selection of:

 A common reference system

 The appropriate scale

 The sensors best suited for the given situation

 The safety values

 Display categories

 Usage, etc.

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION

IMO

A 19/Res.817

15 December 1996

Original: ENGLISH

ASSEMBLY

19th session

Agenda item 10

RESOLUTION A.817(19)

adopted on 23 November 1995

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS FOR ELECTRONIC CHART DISPLAY AND

INFORMATION SYSTEMS (ECDIS)

THE ASSEMBLY,

RECALLING Article 15(j) of the Convention on the International Maritime Organization concerning

the functions of the Assembly in relation to regulations and guidelines concerning maritime safety,

RECALLING ALSO regulation V/20 of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea

(SOLAS), 1974, which requires all ships to carry adequate and up-to-date charts, sailing directions,
lists of

lights, notices to mariners, tide tables and all other nautical publications necessary for the intended
voyage,

NOTING that the up-to-date charts required by SOLAS regulation V/20 can be provided and

displayed electronically on board ships by electronic chart display and information systems (ECDIS),
and that
the other nautical publications required by regulation V/20 may also be so provided and displayed,

RECOGNIZING the need to prepare performance standards for ECDIS in order to ensure the

operational reliability of such equipment, and to ensure that the information provided and displayed

electronically is at least equivalent to that of up-to-date charts and, when also provided and
displayed, other

nautical publications, and to avoid, as far as practicable, adverse interaction between ECDIS and
other

shipborne navigational and communication equipment,

NOTING FURTHER that the International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) has, in co-operation

with IMO, developed complementary recommendations on electronic navigational charts, thereby

standardizing the database and the content, structure and format of the information provided and
displayed,

HAVING CONSIDERED the recommendation made by the Maritime Safety Committee at its

sixty-third session,

1. ADOPTS the Recommendation on Performance Standards for Electronic Chart Display and

Information Systems (ECDIS) set out in the Annex to the present resolution;

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

2. RECOMMENDS Governments to ensure that ECDIS used on ships entitled to fly their flag conform

to performance standards not inferior to those set out in the Annex to the present resolution;

3. REQUESTS the Maritime Safety Committee to keep these Performance Standards under review

and to adopt amendments thereto, as necessary;

4. ALSO REQUESTS the Maritime Safety Committee to ensure that any proposed amendments to this

resolution are agreed with IHO prior to adoption.

- 3 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

ANNEX
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS FOR ELECTRONIC CHART DISPLAY AND

INFORMATION SYSTEMS (ECDIS)

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 The primary function of the ECDIS is to contribute to safe navigation.

1.2 ECDIS, with adequate back-up arrangements, may be accepted as complying with the up-to-date

charts required by regulation V/20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention.

1.3 In addition to the general requirements for shipborne radio equipment forming part of the global

maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) and the requirements for electronic navigational aids

contained in IMO resolution A.694(17)*

, ECDIS should meet the requirements of this performance standard.

1.4 ECDIS should be capable of displaying all chart information necessary for safe and efficient

navigation originated by, and distributed on the authority of, government-authorized hydrographic
offices.

1.5 ECDIS should facilitate simple and reliable updating of the electronic navigational chart.

1.6 Use of ECDIS should reduce the navigational workload as compared to use of a paper chart. It

should enable the mariner to execute in a convenient and timely manner all route planning, route
monitoring

and positioning currently performed on paper charts. It should be capable of continuously plotting
the ship's

position.

1.7 ECDIS should have at least the same reliability and availability of presentation as the paper chart

published by government-authorized hydrographic offices.

1.8 ECDIS should provide appropriate alarms or indications with respect to the information displayed
or

malfunction of the equipment (see Appendix 5).

2 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of these performance standards:

2.1 Electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) means a navigation information
system which, with adequate back-up arrangements, can be accepted as complying with the up-to-
date chart

required by regulation V/20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention, by displaying selected information from
a

system electronic navigational chart (SENC) with positional information from navigation sensors to
assist the

mariner in route planning and route monitoring, and by displaying additional navigation-related
information if

required.

IEC Publication 945 (see Appendix 1).

A 19/Res.817 - 4 -

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

2.2 Electronic navigational chart (ENC) means the database, standardized as to content, structure

and format, issued for use with ECDIS on the authority of government-authorized hydrographic
offices. The

ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation, and may contain
supplementary

information in addition to that contained in the paper chart (e.g. sailing directions) which may be
considered

necessary for safe navigation.

2.3 System electronic navigational chart (SENC) means a database resulting from the

transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means,
and

other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for the display

generation and other navigational functions, and is the equivalent to an up-to-date paper chart. The
SENC

may also contain information from other sources.

2.4 Standard display means the SENC information that should be shown when a chart is first
displayed
on ECDIS. The level of the information it provides for route planning or route monitoring may be
modified

by the mariner according to the mariner's needs.

2.5 Display base means the level of SENC information which cannot be removed from the display,

consisting of information which is required at all times in all geographical areas and all
circumstances. It is

not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.

2.6 Further information on ECDIS definitions may be found in IHO Special Publication S-52, Appendix

3 (see Appendix 1).

3 DISPLAY OF SENC INFORMATION

3.1 ECDIS should be capable of displaying all SENC information.

3.2 SENC information available for display during route planning and route monitoring should be

subdivided into three categories, display base, standard display, and all other information (see
Appendix 2).

3.3 ECDIS should present the standard display at any time by a single operator action.

3.4 When a chart is first displayed on ECDIS, it should provide the standard display at the largest
scale

available in the SENC for the displayed area.

3.5 It should be easy to add or remove information from the ECDIS display. It should not be possible
to

remove information contained in the display base.

3.6 It should be possible for the mariner to select a safety contour from the depth contours provided
by

the SENC. ECDIS should give the safety contour more emphasis than other contours on the display.

3.7 It should be possible for the mariner to select a safety depth. ECDIS should emphasize soundings

equal to or less than the safety depth whenever spot soundings are selected for display.

3.8 The ENC and all updates to it should be displayed without any degradation of their information

content.

3.9 ECDIS should provide a means of ensuring that the ENC and all updates to it have been correctly

loaded into the SENC.

- 5 - A 19/Res.817
I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

3.10 The ENC data and updates to it should be clearly distinguishable from other displayed
information,

such as, for example, that listed in Appendix 3.

4 PROVISION AND UPDATING*

OF CHART INFORMATION

4.1 The chart information to be used in ECDIS should be the latest edition of information originated
by

a government-authorized hydrographic office, and conform to IHO standards.

4.2 The contents of the SENC should be adequate and up-to-date for the intended voyage, as
required

by regulation V/20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention.

4.3 It should not be possible to alter the contents of the ENC.

4.4 Updates should be stored separately from the ENC.

4.5 ECDIS should be capable of accepting official updates to the ENC data provided in conformity
with

IHO standards. These updates should be automatically applied to the SENC. By whatever means
updates

are received, the implementation procedure should not interfere with the display in use.

4.6 ECDIS should also be capable of accepting updates to the ENC data entered manually with simple

means for verification prior to the final acceptance of the data. They should be distinguishable on
the display

from ENC information and its official updates, and not affect display legibility.

4.7 ECDIS should keep a record of updates, including time of application to the SENC.

4.8 ECDIS should allow the mariner to display updates so that the mariner may review their contents
and

ascertain that they have been included in the SENC.

5 SCALE

ECDIS should provide an indication of whether:

.1 the information is displayed at a larger scale than that contained in the ENC; or
.2 own ship's position is covered by an ENC at a larger scale than that provided by the display.

6 DISPLAY OF OTHER NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION

6.1 Radar information or other navigational information may be added to the ECDIS display.
However,

it should not degrade the SENC information, and should be clearly distinguishable from the

SENC information.

6.2 ECDIS and added navigational information should use a common reference system. If this is not
the

case, an indication should be provided.

6.3 Radar

*Appendix 1 to IHO Special Publication S-52 (see Appendix 1).

A 19/Res.817 - 6 -

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

6.3.1 Transferred radar information may contain both the radar image and ARPA information.

6.3.2 If the radar image is added to the ECDIS display, the chart and the radar image should match in
scale

and in orientation.

6.3.3 The radar image and the position from the position sensor should both be adjusted
automatically for

antenna offset from the conning position.

6.3.4 It should be possible to adjust the displayed position of the ship manually so that the radar
image

matches the SENC display.

6.3.5 It should be possible to remove the radar information by single operator action.

7 DISPLAY MODE AND GENERATION OF THE NEIGHBOURING AREA

7.1 It should always be possible to display the SENC in a "north-up" orientation. Other orientations
are

permitted.

7.2 ECDIS should provide for true motion mode. Other modes are permitted.

7.3 When true motion mode is in use, reset and generation of the neighbouring area should take
place
automatically at a distance from the border of the display determined by the mariner.

7.4 It should be possible manually to change the chart area and the position of own ship relative to
the

edge of the display.

8 COLOURS AND SYMBOLS

8.1 IHO recommended colours and symbols should be used to represent SENC information*

8.2 The colours and symbols other than those mentioned in 8.1 should be those used to describe the

navigational elements and parameters listed in Appendix 3 and published by IEC**

8.3 SENC information, when displayed at the scale specified in the ENC, should use the specified size

of symbols, figures and letters* **

8.4 ECDIS should allow the mariner to select whether own ship is displayed in true scale or as a
symbol.

9 DISPLAY REQUIREMENTS

9.1 ECDIS should be capable of displaying information for:

*Appendix 2 to IHO Special Publication S-52 (see Appendix 1).

**IEC Publication 1174.

- 7 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

.1 route planning and supplementary navigation tasks;

.2 route monitoring.

9.2 The effective size of the chart presentation for route monitoring should be at least 270 mm

by 270 mm.

9.3 The display should be capable of complying with the colour and resolution recommendations

of IHO*
.

9.4 The method of presentation should ensure that the displayed information is clearly visible to
more

than one observer in the conditions of light normally experienced on the bridge of the ship by day
and by night.

10 ROUTE PLANNING, MONITORING AND VOYAGE RECORDING

10.1 It should be possible to carry out route planning and route monitoring in a simple and reliable
manner.

10.2 ECDIS should be designed following ergonomic principles for user-friendly operation.

10.3 The largest scale data available in the SENC for the area given should always be used by the
ECDIS

for all alarms or indications of crossing the ship's safety contour and of entering a prohibited area,
and for

alarms and indications according to Appendix 5.

10.4 Route planning

10.4.1 It should be possible to carry out route planning including both straight and curved segments.

10.4.2 It should be possible to adjust a planned route by, for example:

.1 adding waypoints to a route;

.2 deleting waypoints from a route;

.3 changing the position of a waypoint;

.4 changing the order of the waypoints in the route.

10.4.3 It should be possible to plan an alternative route in addition to the selected route. The
selected route

should be clearly distinguishable from the other routes.

10.4.4 An indication is required if the mariner plans a route across an own ship's safety contour.

10.4.5 An indication is required if the mariner plans a route across the boundary of a prohibited area
or of

a geographical area for which special conditions exist (see Appendix 4).

*Appendix 2 to IHO Special Publication S-52.

A 19/Res.817 - 8 -
I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

10.4.6 It should be possible for the mariner to specify a limit of deviation from the planned route at
which

activation of an automatic offtrack alarm should occur.

10.5 Route monitoring

10.5.1 For route monitoring the selected route and own ship's position should appear whenever the
display

covers that area.

10.5.2 It should be possible to display a sea area that does not have the ship on the display (e.g., for
look

ahead, route planning), while route monitoring. If this is done on the display used for route
monitoring, the

automatic route monitoring functions (e.g., updating ship's position, and providing alarms and
indications)

should be continuous. It should be possible to return to the route monitoring display covering own
ship's

position immediately by single operator action.

10.5.3 ECDIS should give an alarm if the ship, within a specified time set by the mariner, is going to
cross

the safety contour.

10.5.4 ECDIS should give an alarm or indication, as selected by the mariner, if the ship, within a
specified

time set by the mariner, is going to cross the boundary of a prohibited area or of a geographical area
for which

special conditions exist (see Appendix 4).

10.5.5 An alarm should be given when the specified limit for deviation from the planned route is
exceeded.

10.5.6 The ship's position should be derived from a continuous positioning system of an accuracy
consistent

with the requirements of safe navigation. Whenever possible, a second independent positioning
method of

a different type should be provided; ECDIS should be capable of identifying discrepancies between
the two

systems.
10.5.7 ECDIS should provide an indication when the input from the position-fixing system is lost.
ECDIS

should also repeat, but only as an indication, any alarm or indication passed to it from a position-
fixing system.

10.5.8 An alarm should be given by ECDIS if the ship, within a specified time or distance set by the
mariner,

is going to reach a critical point on the planned route.

10.5.9 The positioning system and the SENC should be on the same geodetic datum. ECDIS should
give

an alarm if this is not the case.

10.5.10 It should be possible to display an alternative route in addition to the selected route. The
selected

route should be clearly distinguishable from the other routes. During the voyage, it should be
possible for the

mariner to modify the selected sailing route or change to an alternative route.

10.5.11 It should be possible to display:

.1 time-labels along ship's track, manually on demand and automatically at intervals selected

between 1 and 120 m; and

.2 an adequate number of: points, free movable electronic bearing lines, variable and

fixed-range markers and other symbols required for navigation purposes and specified in

Appendix 3.

- 9 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

10.5.12 It should be possible to enter the geographical co-ordinates of any position and then display
that

position on demand. It should also be possible to select any point (features, symbol or position) on
the display

and to read its geographical co-ordinates on demand.

10.5.13 It should be possible to adjust the ship's geographical position manually. This manual
adjustment

should be noted alpha-numerically on the screen, maintained until altered by the mariner, and
automatically
recorded.

10.6 Voyage recording

10.6.1 ECDIS should store and be able to reproduce certain minimum elements required to
reconstruct the

navigation and verify the official database used during the previous 12 hours. The following data
should be

recorded at one-minute intervals:

.1 to ensure a record of own ship's past track: time, position, heading, and speed; and

.2 to ensure a record of official data used: ENC source, edition, date, cell and update history.

10.6.2 In addition, ECDIS should record the complete track for the entire voyage, with time marks at

intervals not exceeding 4 hours.

10.6.3 It should not be possible to manipulate or change the recorded information.

10.6.4 ECDIS should have the capability to preserve the record of the previous 12 hours and of the
voyage

track.

11 ACCURACY

11.1 The accuracy of all calculations performed by ECDIS should be independent of the
characteristics

of the output device and should be consistent with the SENC accuracy.

11.2 Bearings and distances drawn on the display, or those measured between features already
drawn on

the display, should have an accuracy no less than that afforded by the resolution of the display.

12 CONNECTIONS WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT*

12.1 ECDIS should not degrade the performance of any equipment providing sensor inputs. Nor
should

the connection of optional equipment degrade the performance of ECDIS below this standard.

12.2 ECDIS should be connected to systems providing continuous position-fixing, heading and speed

information.

13 PERFORMANCE TESTS, MALFUNCTION ALARMS AND INDICATIONS

IEC Publication 1162.

A 19/Res.817 - 10 -

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

13.1 ECDIS should be provided with means for carrying out on-board tests of major functions either

automatically or manually. In case of a failure, the test should display information to indicate which
module

is at fault.

13.2 ECDIS should provide a suitable alarm or indication of system malfunction.

14 BACK-UP ARRANGEMENTS

Adequate back-up arrangements should be provided to ensure safe navigation in case of an ECDIS

failure.

.1 Facilities enabling a safe take-over of the ECDIS functions should be provided in order to

ensure that an ECDIS failure does not result in a critical situation.

.2 A back-up arrangement should be provided facilitating means for safe navigation of the

remaining part of the voyage in case of an ECDIS failure.

15 POWER SUPPLY

15.1 It should be possible to operate ECDIS and all equipment necessary for its normal functioning
when

supplied by an emergency source of electrical power in accordance with the appropriate

requirements of

chapter II-1 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention.

15.2 Changing from one source of power supply to another, or any interruption of the supply for a
period

of up to 45 s, should not require the equipment to be re-initialized manually.

- 11 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

APPENDIX 1
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

The following international organizations have developed technical standards and specifications, as

listed below, for use in conjunction with this standard. The latest edition of these documents should
be

obtained from the organization concerned.

INTERNATIONAL HYDROGRAPHIC ORGANIZATION

Address: Directing Committee

International Hydrographic Bureau

BP 445

MC 98011 Monaco CEDEX Phone: + 33 9350 6587

Principality of Monaco Fax: + 33 9325 2003

Publications

Special Publication No.S-52 "Provisional Specifications for Chart Content and Display of ECDIS",

2nd Edition, September 1992

S-52 Appendix 1 "Report of the IHO (COE) Working Group on Updating the Electronic Chart", 1st
Edition,

June 1990

S-52 Appendix 2 "Provisional Colour and Symbol Specifications for ECDIS", 1st Edition, February 1991

S-52 Appendix 3 "Glossary of ECDIS-related Terms", 1st Edition, July 1991

Special Publication No.S-57 "IHO Transfer Standard for Digital Hydrographic Data"

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

Address: IEC Central Office

3 rue de Varembé

PO Box 131

CH-1211 Geneva 20 Phone: + 41 22 734 01 50

Switzerland Fax: + 41 22 733 38 43

Publications
IEC Publication 1174 "Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)"

IEC Publication 945 "General Requirements for Shipborne Radio Equipment Forming Part of the
Global

Maritime Distress and Safety System and Marine Navigational Equipment"

IEC Publication 1162 "Digital Interfaces - Navigation and Radiocommunication Equipment On Board
Ship"

A 19/Res.817 - 12 -

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

APPENDIX 2

SENC INFORMATION AVAILABLE FOR DISPLAY DURING

ROUTE PLANNING AND ROUTE MONITORING

1 Display base, permanently retained on the ECDIS display, consisting of:

.1 coastline (high water);

.2 own ship's safety contour, to be selected by the mariner;

.3 indication of isolated underwater dangers at depths of less than the safety contour which lie

within the safe waters defined by the safety contour;

.4 indication of isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour

such as bridges, overhead wires, etc., including buoys and beacons, whether or not these are

being used as aids to navigation;

.5 traffic routeing systems;

.6 scale, range, orientation and display mode;

.7 units of depth and height.

2 Standard display, to be displayed when the chart is first displayed by ECDIS, consisting of:

.1 display base

.2 drying line

.3 indication of fixed and floating aids to navigation

.4 boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.

.5 visual and radar conspicuous features

.6 prohibited and restricted areas

.7 chart scale boundaries

.8 indication of cautionary notes

3 All other information, displayed individually on demand, for example:

.1 spot soundings

.2 submarine cables and pipelines

.3 ferry routes

.4 details of all isolated dangers

.5 details of aids to navigation

.6 contents of cautionary notes

.7 ENC edition date

.8 geodetic datum

.9 magnetic variation

.10 graticule

.11 place names

- 13 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

A 19/Res.817 - 14 -

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

APPENDIX 3

NAVIGATIONAL ELEMENTS AND PARAMETERS*

1 Own ship

.1 Past track with time marks for primary track

.2 Past track with time marks for secondary track

2 Vector for course and speed made good

3 Variable range marker and/or electronic bearing line

4 Cursor

5 Event

.1 Dead reckoning position and time (DR)

.2 Estimated position and time (EP)

6 Fix and time

7 Position line and time

8 Transferred position line and time

.1 Predicted tidal stream or current vector with effective time and strength (in box)

.2 Actual tidal stream or current vector with effective time and strength (in box)

9 Danger highlight

10 Clearing line

11 Planned course and speed to make good. Speed is shown in box

12 Waypoint

13 Distance to run

14 Planned position with date and time

15 Visual limits of lights arc to show rising/dipping range

See IEC Publication 1174.

- 15 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

16 Position and time of "wheelover"

A 19/Res.817 - 16 -
I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

APPENDIX 4

AREAS FOR WHICH SPECIAL CONDITIONS EXIST

The following are the areas which ECDIS should detect and for which it should provide an alarm or

indication under 10.4.5 and 10.5.4:

Traffic separation zone

Traffic routeing scheme crossing or roundabout

Traffic routeing scheme precautionary area

Two-way traffic route

Deepwater route

Recommended traffic lane

Inshore traffic zone

Fairway

Restricted area

Caution area

Offshore production area

Areas to be avoided

Military practice area

Seaplane landing area

Submarine transit lane

Ice area

Channel

Fishing ground

Fishing prohibited

Pipeline area

Cable area
Anchorage area

Anchorage prohibited

Dumping ground

Spoil ground

Dredged area

Cargo transshipment area

- 17 - A 19/Res.817

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

Incineration area

Specially protected areas

A 19/Res.817 - 18 -

I:\ASSEMBLY\19\RES\817

APPENDIX 5

ALARMS AND INDICATORS

Section Requirements Information

10.3 Alarm or Indication Largest scale for alarm

10.4.6 Alarm Exceeding off-track limits

10.5.3 Alarm Crossing safety contour

10.5.4 Alarm or Indication Area with special conditions

10.5.5 Alarm Deviation from route

10.5.8 Alarm Approach to critical point

10.5.9 Alarm Different geodetic datum

13.2 Alarm or Indication Malfunction of ECDIS

5.1 Indication Information overscale

5.2 Indication Larger scale ENC available

6.2 Indication Different reference system

10.4.4 Indication Route planning across safety contour

10.4.5 Indication Route planning across specified area

10.5.7 Indication Positioning system failure

13.1 Indication System test failure

In this performance standard the definitions of indicators and alarms provided in the

IMO publication "Code on Alarms and Indicators" (IMO-867E) apply.

Alarm: An alarm or alarm system which announces by audible means, or audible and visual means,

a condition requiring attention.

Indicator: Visual indication giving information about the condition of a system or equipment.

Navigation at the Operational Level

Use of ECDIS to Maintain the Safety of

Navigation (IMO Model Course 1.27)

STCW/KUP: Elements of ECDIS

Topics

Course Introduction and familiarization plan

- general introduction

- administration
- familiarization with ECDIS learning environment

Purpose of ECDIS

- revised IMO performances of ECDIS

- information type vs navigation display

- ECDIS data presentation

At the end of the session students should be

able to:

Discuss the general introduction and general

familiarization plan with ECDIS learning

environment

Introduce revised IMO performance for ECDIS

Differentiate between display options

At the end of the session students should be

able to:

identify information types and areas on

navigation display

Apply presentation of ECDIS data

ECDIS – A basic introduction

Arguably the most important step in navigation

for more than half a century, ECDIS has evolved

from a means of displaying charts electronically

to the foundation of e-Navigation. For a long

time and until it was clear that ECDIS would be

made mandatory, there were few

manufacturers active in the field targeting

commercial ships.

ECDIS – A basic introduction

Several of the early systems which had evolved

from products for the leisure sector did not

meet the initial performance standards for ECDIS

and have been discontinued although they can

still be used on non-SOLAS vessels if required.

ECDIS – A basic introduction

In essence an ECDIS is a computer programmed with

appropriate systems to display electronic charts

either on the device itself if it is stand alone, or onto

a screen in an integrated bridge or navigation

system. An ECDIS can be used in two ways – for

passage planning and in operational navigation.

When both are done by navigators on board, there

are benefits to be had but many ECDIS models allow

for passage plans to be imported rather than

entered in manually.
ECDIS – A basic introduction

The idea that a passage plan can be prepared in a shore

office and transmitted as a data file is intriguing but can be

dangerous if wrong parameters for the ship (draught,

beam or length for example) are included and not

checked. Some ECDIS models apparently have the ability

for a passage plan to be reversed at the touch of a button.

A useful feature for some ships on regular routes but

highly dangerous if the system cannot make allowances

for traffic separation schemes as has happened in some

cases.

The role of ECDIS

The prime role of an ECDIS is to display navigational

detail. Both paper charts and their modern equivalent

are produced using the exact same information. But

whereas the former is nothing more than a graphic

representation of a defined area with depth contours

and hazards marked, either when the chart was

produced or added by navigators using information

from Notices to Mariners, electronic navigation charts

(ENCs) are designed to have an interactive element.

The role of ECDIS

Electronic charts come in two basic types, raster

and vector. Both types are drawn or compiled

using data from actual surveys and information

from authorities concerning aids to navigation,

restricted zones, navigational hazards (wrecks or

submarine cables for example).

The role of ECDIS

A Raster chart is a scan of a paper chart and as

such has the same clear and easy to use style

mariners have been accustomed to. What makes

navigation with raster charts appealing is that

the updating is automated and GPS position can

be overlaid to give real time situational

awareness.

The role of ECDIS

A vector chart on the other hand is a database that

permits a computer generated representation of the

chart making use of detailed data that can be further

interrogated. Objects on a vector chart can be

selected or ‘clicked on’ to reveal further details and

the data that is contained within the chart can be

accessed by the ECDIS to activate certain features.

The role of ECDIS

For example, the depths and contours on a raster chart are mere

inanimate pixels but while the vector chart will show the same figures

and lines, if an alarm feature relying on depth is activated, the ECDIS

can inform the user of any conflict or danger. Zooming is a highly

useful feature of modern computing capability and the ECDIS is no

different. However, when zooming a raster chart, every detail will

grow larger and more pixelated making it difficult to interpret. By

contrast, zooming on a vector chart will simply move the display to a

different scale without any pixilation occurring. If zooming out on a

vector chart to the smallest scale, some objects and features may

become over-written and it may be necessary for the operator to

turn off some layers of detailing.

The role of ECDIS

National hydrographic offices are the only

official source for chart data for SOLAS and

electronic charts produced by official

hydrographic offices for use with ECDIS must be

vector charts that conform to standards laid

down by the International Hydrographic

Organization.

The role of ECDIS

The key standard that applies to current ENCs is

S-57 which covers the data and S-63 which is an

S-57 chart with additional security encryption to

deter illegal amendments and pirating of ENCs.

ECDIS makers have been obliged to incorporate

means of dealing with the encryption in their

products.
The role of ECDIS

Raster charts are not considered as complying

with SOLAS requirement for ECDIS but there use

may be permitted for navigation in areas where

no official ENC exists. A raster chart may also

qualify as a back-up for an ECDIS.

The role of ECDIS

Although an S-57 ENC is the requirement for SOLAS,

manufacturers of ECDIS have devised their own graphics

and hardware configurations and the data that is

contained within an ENC will need to be converted into a

System Electronic Navigation Chart (SENC). Some major

distributors of ENCs have developed their own system

standards which a number of ECDIS makers have

incorporated into their systems. Sometimes ECDIS

makers refer to products that can operate with several of

these distributors as ‘multi-fuel’ ECDIS.

The role of ECDIS

There are a number of ECDIS makers that

distribute the official AVCS dataset in their own

internal SENC format, ChartWorld, Navtor and

Transas. C-MAP also operates a SENC data

service in conjunction with Primar.

The role of ECDIS

These services can in some instances reduce the

ENC installation time as the dataset has come in

a converted state. The number of OEMs offering

this service is low because of the need for a

large install base to make the service profitable

as each SENC is proprietary. Not all

Hydrographic Offices allow their data to be

converted to SENC on shore.

The role of ECDIS

S-57 is the current standard for ENC production but

the ECDIS makers and the IHO are already looking to

the future and a new standard S-100 is in the

process of development. S-100 came into force on 1

January 2010 and is the document that explains how

the IHO will use and extend the geospatial standards

for hydrographic, maritime and related issues. S-100

extends the scope of the existing S-57 Hydrographic

Transfer standard.

The role of ECDIS

Unlike S-57, S-100 is inherently more flexible and

makes provision for such things as the use of

imagery and gridded data types, enhanced metadata

and multiple encoding formats. It also provides a

more flexible and dynamic maintenance regime via a

dedicated on-line registry. S-100 provides the data

framework for the development of the next

generation of ENC products, as well as other related

digital products required by the hydrographic,

maritime and GIS communities.

The role of ECDIS

Work has been completed at the IHO on the latest

version of the presentation library which is now

mandatory for all new systems and will become so

for existing models by August 2017. IHO is also

working on the new ENC standard S-101, derived

using S-100. The International Association of

Lighthouse Authorities are using S-100 as the basis

for the e-Navigation concepts being developed.

The role of ECDIS

Because the new presentation library will mean

that new systems will need to incorporate it and

older systems may need upgrading. Buyers of

ECDIS systems should satisfy themselves that

they are purchasing a system that conforms to

the latest requirements.

ECDIS Overlay information

In addition to its basic role as a device for working with

electronic charts, the ECDIS can also be used to display

additional layers of information. Not all can do this and

not all are set up to do it. When navigating it is not

unusual for radar, ENC, AIS and other data all to be

displayed on a single screen. This permits all information

to be visible at all times but not all agree that this is a good

thing. A cluttered display can lead to some important

information being missed while in the event of a system

failure it may take vital time in setting up displays on other

screens or on the radar or AIS equipment itself.

ECDIS Overlay information

However, the ability to overlay information when passage

planning can be very useful. Depending on the ECDIS maker

it may be possible to overlay information on weather, piracy,

ECAs and Notices to Mariners. One service that can do the

latter is the UKHO’s Admiralty Information Overlay.

Distributed as a free service to subscribers to AVCS the

overlay is designed to be displayed on top of a standard

ECDIS chart display and can be switched on and off without

changing the underlying chart.

ECDIS Overlay information

As the user zooms in or out, the ECDIS will

automatically select charts of a suitable scale

and the overlay features relevant to that

selected chart. For example, a Temporary NtM

that applies only to a large-scale chart will not

be displayed when smaller scale charts of the

same area are being used.

ECDIS Overlay information

All Admiralty temporary and permanent NtMs that are in

force are included and each is displayed as a simple red

polygon (usually rectangular) with red hatched fill which

indicates the area affected by the NtM. Each NtM carries the

same NtM number that is used in the Notices to Mariners

Bulletin. The full text of the NtM is included as an associated

text file which can be displayed by selecting the ‘Temporary

Notice to Mariners’ or ‘Preliminary Notice to Mariners’

feature in the ECDIS Pick Report. Any associated diagrams

can also be viewed through the Pick Report.

ECDIS Overlay information

C-MAP also has an overlay service for NtMs and its

OceanView service allows weather and piracy overlays either

on systems on board or in a shore-based office for voyage

planning purposes.

There may be a common performance standard for ECDIS

but there are very large differences between individual

makers’ products and in the way they are intended to be

used on board. There will almost certainly be big differences

in the level of support and service offered but this will only

be learnt from experience.

ECDIS Overlay information

Using ECDIS will eventually become second nature to navigators but

for the time being the range of options is not seen as a good thing in

all quarters. As an indication, the foreword to the UK’s MAIB report

into the grounding of the chemical tanker Ovit in the Dover Straits in

2013 highlighted the problem saying “This is the third grounding

investigated by the MAIB where watchkeepers’ failure to use an

ECDIS properly has been identified as one of the causal factors. As

this report is published, there are over 30 manufacturers of ECDIS

equipment, each with their own designs of user interface, and little

evidence that a common approach is developing”.

ECDIS Overlay information

The ECDIS related accidents referred to were only

those investigated by MAIB which means they either

involved UK-flagged vessels or happened in British

waters. It can safely be assumed that there have

probably been many more involving other vessels and

in other waters. The report had other comments

about ECDIS use and training but while incidents of

this type are regrettable, they were not unforeseen.

ECDIS Overlay information

Almost all modern vessels leave the shipyard with a

fully integrated navigation or bridge system in which

ECDIS is a vital element. However, now the retrofit

part of the rollout programme is in full swing several

different types of ECDIS will be required to meet the

different standards of bridge facilities. Undoubtedly

an ECDIS is most effective when combined with other

navigation systems but this will not be possible on

every, or even most, retrofit ships.

ECDIS Overlay information

Here the commonest and cheapest solution will

be a simple standalone system that allows

compliance but little more than that. It may well

be that on some ships the ECDIS will be declared

as an aid to navigation and sit unused in the

corner of the bridge while navigation on board is

practised as it always has with paper charts and

little else.

ECDIS Overlay information

There are more advanced stand-alone console types

that can be fed with data from other systems often

making use of the fact that the VDR already draws

much of the data together and provides a good source

to tap in to. In an integrated navigation system with

multiple screens it will be possible for even a single

ECDIS to be linked to several of them allowing for a

high degree of flexibility in workstations.

ECDIS Overlay information

If an operator decides to settle for a ‘paperless’ bridge and

this is allowed by the flag state, then a dual ECDIS system is

required under SOLAS. This would naturally suggest a second

machine but some manufacturers do provide a dual ECDIS

solution in a single console. The backup ECDIS is permitted to

have a marginally smaller minimum display size and this may

favour the makers of PC type systems, although it has to be

said that most systems on the market do have displays that

exceed the minimum size required by a considerable margin.

ECDIS Overlay information

The requirement for a second ECDIS if paper charts

are not carried is to ensure that in the event of a

system failure, a backup system will be available. With

paper charts onboard, a means of navigation will

always be there even should a machine fail but the

question has been raised concerning what the legal

situation will be if a ship with dual-ECDIS installation

has a system failure that would mean only one ECDIS

available.

ECDIS Overlay information

If this occurs at sea, the assumption is that the

failed ECDIS will be repaired at the next port of

call, but if that is not possible will PSC authorities

permit the ship to sail since it is clear that no

backup will be available in the event of the

second ECDIS also failing? Some have suggested

that a third ECDIS will resolve this problem but

that is true only if two units do not fail.

ECDIS Overlay information

Since an ECDIS is nothing more than a specialised

computer, the likelihood of systems suffering

electronic failure is on par with any other computer

system. In an integrated bridge system it is likely that

an extra display will always be available thus

removing one source of potential failure that exists

with stand-alone systems. The matter of virus

infection is however a different problem altogether.

ECDIS Overlay information

Few ECDIS manufacturers offer a wide range of systems

although some have recognized the different needs of

customers and can offer a system to suit most pockets. In

many cases the difference between a basic machine and the

most advanced will not be obvious from the outside since

the difference is in the software loaded onto the machine or

the features activated. These machines make upgrading to a

higher level easier and cheaper than might otherwise be the

case.

ECDIS Overlay information

In a small number of cases, the same device

might be sold as a radar, a chart radar or an

ECDIS with different aspects of the same

pre-loaded software being activated. Some

ECDIS come with a full catalogue of ENCs

preloaded and only require a licence key to be

entered for the chart to become available.

ECDIS Overlay information

For shipowners unsure of what to commit to, there are

alternatives to outright purchase. A growing number of makers

and some independent service companies are offering a leasing

service. Leasing would appear to be an ideal way of equipping a

fleet without a high capital outlay and also permits a ‘try before

you buy’ approach that will identify the best system to suit an

individual operator. Another benefit is that leased equipment can

be exchanged for upgraded models as required and can also be

swapped in case of a breakdown under the terms of the lease

agreement.

How to install opencpn

1. Go to Marinersguide.xyz

2. Select PC Apps look for OpenCPN then click download

3. Select download opencpn software

4. After installing open cpn software download worldwide maps

5. Select download worldwide maps

6. Maps in zip file so need to extract

7. To extract worldwide maps use 7 zip

8. No 7 zip need to download

9. To download 7 zip; go to 7zip.org

10. Download 64 bit x 64 or 32 bit x 86 depending on your laptop windows

11. Install 7 zip then extract the worldwide maps

12. The password for extracting is MarinersGuide

13. Install the extracted worldwide maps to your opencpn

14. Click gear sign

15. Go to charts, add directory

16. Go to your extracted file

17. Select folder

18. Once added to the directory, click apply

19. You have now the worldwide maps in your open cpn and you can start making routes

Note: GPS not required for learning purposes only but for actual you need to have a GPS input.

Below are URL for installation of open cpn. Control click or copy and paste it on google tab and you

will be redirected to the video. Also find other learning materials on you tube.

How to install opencpn to cellphones and tablet

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=P1JqMF9EoK4

Opencpn Mobile Phones | Opencpn Tablet | Opencpn Charts | Seaman Vlog - YouTube

How to install opencpn and charts

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xj93Jw172fw

SUBJECT: Navigation 6 – Operational use of ECDIS

MODULE No. 01

Topic: Significance of ECDIS in Navigation, IMO performance standards for ECDIS.

Time Frame: Week 1 – Feb 8-11, 2022

Lesson 1: Significance of ECDIS in Navigation, IMO performance standards for ECDIS.

I. INTRODUCTION

The Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) is a development in the

navigational chart system used in naval vessels and ships. With the use of the electronic

chart system, it has become easier for a ship’s navigating crew to pinpoint locations and

attain directions.

ECDIS complies with IMO Regulation V/19 & V/27 of SOLAS convention as amended, by
displaying selected information from a System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC). ECDIS

equipment complying with SOLAS requirements can be used as an alternative to paper

charts. Besides enhancing navigational safety, ECDIS greatly eases the navigator’s

workload with its automatic capabilities such as route planning, route monitoring, automatic

ETA computation and ENC updating. In addition, ECDIS provides many other sophisticated

navigation and safety features, including continuous data recording for later analysis.

The ECDIS utilises the feature of the Global Positioning System (GPS) to successfully

pinpoint the navigational points. It also has to be noted that the ECDIS adheres to the

stipulations set by the International Maritime Organisation, and thus it adds to the

trustworthiness of the electronic chart system. ECDIS is basically a navigational information

system, interfaced with other navigational equipments such as the GPS, Gyro, RADAR,

ARPA, Echo Sounder etc..

At the end of this lesson, you are expected to:

• Discuss the general introduction and general familiarization plan with ECDIS learning

environment

• Introduce revised IMO performance for ECDIS

• Differentiate between display options

• identify information types and areas on navigation display

• Apply presentation of ECDIS data

II. INSTRUCTIONS

1. You are required to be attentive to the lesson presented and ready to take notes.

2. The topic requires a lot of reading. Patience is the key in order to cope up in

understanding this lesson.

3. You need a Laptop, Ipad or cell phone that can play videos or personal computer

and accessories, notebook, writing materials and all things you may need for online

class. Please note to use the new email address supplied to join the new G-suite

GC.

4. Your activity this week are: Purpose and elements of ECDIS in the safety of

navigation & Interpretation and analysis of information obtained from ECDIS based
on the IMO performance standards for ECDIS.

5. Please follow instructions. You may ask questions through Google classroom

stream, my messenger “Buenamado Ordonio”, or Messenger group chat or even

call me on my cell phone 09999805861. Please bear with me because I am

attending to many students and be patient to wait when I will be able to reply your

concern.

III. LESSON

A. PRESENTATION OF THE LESSON

Please proceed to the Google Classroom under classwork, take your activity and

reading materials under Module 1, lesson 1, significance of ECDIS in navigation and IMO

performance standards for ECDIS.

B. DISCUSSION

Discussion to be held during your virtual hour.

C. ACTIVITY

Go to Google Classroom and under classwork, Lesson 1. Download lessons.

Accomplish activities posted.

D. SUMMARY

Types of ECDIS charts

1. Raster Chart (RNC): RNCs are direct copy or a scan of the paper charts. It looks identical

to a paper chart as all the information shown is directly printed. The chart only grows

larger or smaller as per the zooming and when rotated, everything rotates.

2. Vector Chart (ENC): ENCs are computer generated charts. The details on an ENC can be

turned on and off depending on the requirement of the user. Objects on the ENC can be

clicked for more details on the same. Depths can also be monitored to obtain a warning

with regard to grounding. When zooming, the features grow large or small but the text

remains the same.

ECDIS covered under the following

1. SOLAS Chapter 5

2. Port State Control Requirements

3. IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS

4. S 52 Standard (Display Standard)

5. S 57 Standard (Compilation Standard)

6. S 63 Standard (IHO Data Protection/Encryption Standard)

ENC (Electronic Navigational Chart) Layers

 Display Base (No information can be deleted)

 Standard Display

 Full Display

 Custom Display

Minimum Interface Requirement

 Position Sensor

 Heading Sensor

 Speed Sensor

ECDIS Compliance

 Approved ECDIS with approved backup

 Type approved hardware

 Type approved software

 Approved installation

 Official Chart Services

 Training of Officers

Chart Updating

Updates to the ECDIS charts may reach the ship in various ways, depending upon the

capabilities of the service provider and the onboard communication facilities.

 On data distribution media (DVD)

 As an email attachment (SATCOM)

 As a broadcast message via SATCOM plus additional communication hardware

 As an internet download

Voyage Recording

 Minute by minute recording for the past 12 hours of the voyage

 Record of 4 hourly intervals of voyage track for a period of 6 months

Dual Fuel: Dual Fuel is the use of RNCs when ENCs are not available with approved paper

chart backup.

Alarms and/or Indication in ECDIS

Alarms

1. Exceeding cross track limits

2. Crossing selected safety contour

3. Deviation from the route

4. Critical Point Approach

5. Different datum from the positioning system

Alarms or Indication

1. Largest scale for alarm (present chart too small a scale)

2. Area with special conditions

3. Malfunction of ECDIS

Indication

1. Chart over scale (zoomed too close)

2. Larger scale ENC available

3. Different reference units

4. Route crosses safety contour

5. Route crosses specific area activated for alarms

6. System test failure

For ease of understanding, Indications may be either visual or audible whereas Alarms must be

audible and may be visual as well.

Power Supply

 It should be possible to operate ECDIS and all equipment necessary for its normal

functioning when supplied by an emergency source of electrical power

 Changing from one source of power supply to another or any interruption of supply for a

period of upto 45 seconds should not require the equipment to be manually re-initialized

IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS

1. The primary function of ECDIS is to contribute to safe navigation

2. ECDIS with adequate back up arrangements may be accepted as complying with the up

to date charts required by Regulation V/20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention

3. In addition to the general requirements for shipborne radio equipment forming part of the

GMDSS and for electronics navigational aids contained in IMO Resolution A.694 (17),

ECDIS should meet the requirements of this performance standard

4. ECDIS should be capable of displaying all chart information necessary for safe and

efficient navigation originated by, and distributed on the authority of government

authorized hydrographic offices

5. ECDIS should facilitate simple and reliable updating of the electronic navigational chart

6. ECDIS should reduce the navigational workload compared to using the paper chart. It

should enable the mariner to execute in a convenient and timely manner all route

planning, monitoring and positioning currently performed on paper charts. It should be

capable of continuously plotting the ship’s position

7. ECDIS should have at least the same reliability and availability of presentation as the

paper chart published by the Government authorized hydrographic offices.

ECDIS should provide appropriate alarms or indications with respect to the information

displayed or malfunction of the equipment

E. EVALUATION

Essay test

IV. MATERIALS, REFERENCES

PPT and word reading materials. Videos

What is CATZOC or Zone of confidence

If the possible errors in depth and position where depth is marked

were constant on the charts, it would have been easier to just

apply a constant error.

But these errors are not constant.

As the technology advanced, the errors in these readings became

marginalized and readings taken were more accurate.

But how do we know which readings are accurate and which are

not?

Also what maximum errors can be expected in these reading?

Information about CATZOC (or zone of confidence) helps in this.

Based upon the error in position and depth, the accuracy data is

divided into 6 zones of confidence (CATZOC).

Each zone of confidence (CATZOC) has been assigned the

maximum errors that it can have in depths and its positions

marked on the charts.

So if for a chart or ENC, the CATZOC is 4 star (zone of confidence

B), this would mean that

 the position of the depths and dangers marked on this ENC may

be inaccurate for about 50 meters

 There may be an error in the depths for up to 1 meter + 2% of

depth
So if at any place the charted depth is showing 20 meters, the

error in this could be 1.4 Meters (1 meters + 2% of 20 meters).

CATZOC information on paper charts

It is not that CATZOC has surfaced recently. It had been there

since long.

On paper charts it was in form of something called “the source

diagram”.

On each paper chart, there is a source diagram which tells the

source of the information on the paper chart.

For example look at this source diagram of BA chart.

It has divided the areas based on the nature of survey done for

this chart.

As you can see that in Area “c and d” depths were taken by a lead

line. The depths in this area can be expected to have significant

error.

Navigators need to apply this error to the depths. But again, How

much error?

There is a sad news.

Paper charts never gave how much error these depths can have.
It was left to the mariner to make the judgment about the

information provided in the source diagram.

But then UKHO realized this and updated the source diagram on

the new charts with CATZOC information.

Source: Admiralty 

But till this date, that is only a handful of charts among

thousands.

Catzoc on ECDIS

On ECDIS, the CATZOC information is displayed as CATZOC

symbols.

These ECDIS symbols are in form of the number of stars.

What is ECDIS?

An Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) is a computer-based

navigation system that complies with IMO regulations and can be used as an alternative

to paper navigation charts. Integrating a variety of real-time information, it is an

automated decision aid capable of continuously determining a vessel’s position in

relation to land, charted objects, navigation aids and unseen hazards.

An ECDIS includes electronic navigational charts (ENC) and integrates position

information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) and other navigational sensors,

such as radar, fathometer and automatic identification systems (AIS). It may also

display additional navigation-related information, such as sailing directions.

ECDIS is defined in the IMO ECDIS Performance Standards (IMO Resolution

A.817(19)) as follows:

Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) means a navigation

information system which, with adequate back up arrangements, can be accepted as

complying with the up-to-date chart required by regulation V/19 & V/27 of the 1974

SOLAS Convention, by displaying selected information from navigation sensors to

assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring, and by displaying additional

navigation-related information if required.

The Operational Use of Electronic Chart Display

and Information Systems (ECDIS)

Part 1 – Legal Aspects, History and Regulations

Philippine Seafarers Training Center

To enhance navigational safety by the safe

operation of ECDIS equipment,

proper use of ECDIS related information and

knowledge of the limitations of ECDIS

equipment.

Objective

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Legal Aspects and Requirements

The STCW and ISM Codes put the

responsibility firmly on the shipowner to

ensure that mariners on their vessels are

competent to carry out the duties they are

expected to perform.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Legal Aspects and Requirements

If a ship is fitted with ECDIS, the shipowner has

a duty to ensure that users of such a system

are properly trained in the operation and use

of electronic charts and are familiar with the

shipboard equipment before using it

operationally at sea.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

STCW 95

Table A-II/1

Navigation at the Operational Level

Thorough knowledge of and ability to use

navigational charts and publications, such as

sailing directions, tide tables, notices to mariners,

radio navigational warnings and ship’s routeing

information

Note: ECDIS systems are considered to be included

under the term “charts”

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 2 - Definitions

Nautical chart or nautical publication is a special-

purpose map or book, or a specially compiled

database from which such a map or book is

derived, that is issued officially by or on the

authority of a Government, authorized

Hydrographic Office or other relevant government

institution and is designed to meet the

requirements of marine navigation.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 19 – Carriage Requirements

2.1 All ships irrespective of size shall have:

2.1.4 nautical charts and nautical publications to

plan and display the ship’s route for the intended

voyage and to plot and monitor positions

throughout the voyage; an Electronic Chart Display

and Information System (ECDIS) may be accepted as

meeting the chart carriage requirements of this

subparagraph;

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 19 – Carriage Requirements

2.1.5 back-up arrangements to meet the

functional requirements of subparagraph 2.1.4, if

this function is partly or fully fulfilled by electronic

means.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 19 – Carriage Requirements

PAPER CHARTS

ECDIS

ECDIS

PAPER CHARTS
ECDIS

“Chart-Radar” is a radar-based system meeting the IMO Performance

Standards of IMO Resolution A.477 (XII), as amended by MSC.64(67)

ECDIS + CHART RADAR

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 19 – Carriage Requirements

In cases where ECDIS only is used, you MUST carry

“Official Electronic Navigational Charts (ENC’s)” on

board. Official ENC’s are produced by the National

Hydrographic Offices in each country.

In areas where ENC’s are not available, ECDIS may

operate in the Raster Chart Display System (RCDS) mode.

In the RCDS mode Raster Navigational Charts (RNC’s) can

be used to meet SOLAS carriage requirements, only if

allowed and approved by the flag state.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V
Regulation 19 – Carriage Requirements

Due to the limitations of RNC’s as compared to ENC’s,

IMO Performance Standards require that “an appropriate

portfolio of up-to-date paper charts” be carried when

operating ECDIS in the RCDS mode of operation.

In areas where ENC’s or RNC’s are not available, ships

must carry all paper charts necessary for the intended

voyage.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Appropriate Portfolio

Appropriate Portfolio of up-to-date paper Charts (APC)

means a suite of paper charts of a scale to show

sufficient detail of topography, depths, navigational

hazards, aids to navigation, charted routes, and routeing

measures to provide the mariner with information on the

overall navigational environment.

The APC should provide adequate look-ahead capability.

Coastal States will provide details of the charts which

meet the requirement of this portfolio, and these details

are included in a worldwide database maintained by the

IHO.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 27 – Nautical Charts & Nautical

Publications

Nautical charts and nautical publications, such as

sailing directions, lists of lights, notices to

mariners, tide tables and all other nautical

publications necessary for the intended voyage,

shall be adequate and up to date.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• 1982 - Japanese fishing vessels started

using video plotters

• 1984 - More than 2000 were in use -

mostly on tankers

• Computers became more powerful and

cheaper

History of ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Several manufacturers were now developing

electronic chart systems, it was of immediate

importance to all concerned to have at least a

first draft of the IHO and IMO guidance for both

the Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) and it’s

display systems (ECDIS).

History of ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• 1986 - The IMO, IHO, IEC and several other

International organizations form committees

and working groups to develop standards for

ECDIS.

• The IHO establish a Committee on ECDIS (COE)

which later became called the Committee on

Hydrographic Requirements for Information

Systems (CHRIS).

History of ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• 1987 - The IHO/COE developed the first draft

standards for chart content, display & updating (S-52)

and also the transfer standard for digital hydrographic

data (S-57).

• 1989 - The IMO/IHO Harmonization Group on ECDIS

(HGE) developed draft performance standards for

ECDIS based around IHO’s standards for electronic

chart content and display (S-52) and digital

hydrographic data (S-57).

History of ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• 1990 – The DX-90 Data Exchange Standard is

developed primarily by NOAA.

• 1992 – The IHO officially adopt S-57 as the

Hydrographic Data Transfer Standard at the

14th International Hydrographic Conference in

May 1992.

History of ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• 1993 - The IMO Sub-Committee on the Safety

of Navigation (NAV) endorse the Provisional

Performance Standards for ECDIS and submit

to the Maritime Safety Committee (MSC) for

approval and submission to the 1995 IMO

Assembly for adoption.

History of ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

IMO Performance Standards for Electronic Chart Display

and Information Systems (ECDIS)

Adopted on 23rd November 1995

by IMO Resolution A.817(19)

IMO Resolution A.817(19)

Consists of 15 sections and 5 Appendix

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• 1996 - The DX-90 data transfer standard was

transformed into S-57 and released as

Edition 3.0 in November 1996.

S-57 Hydrographic Data Transfer Standard

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

In 1996 IMO Resolution A.817(19) was amended by

Resolution MSC.64(67)

This Resolution added a new appendix to the annex to

Resolution A.817(19)

Appendix 6 - Back-Up Requirements

Adopted 4th December 1996

This describes the functional and operational requirements

to enable the timely transfer to the back-up system to

allow the vessel to be navigated safely until the

termination of the voyage.

Resolution MSC.64(67)

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publishes

International Standard IEC 61174

Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) – Operational and Performance
Requirements, Methods of

Testing and Required Test Results

First Edition 1998-08

IEC 61174

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

IMO

MSC

NAV

Res A.817(19)

IEC
TC80

WG7

IEC 61174

IHO

WEND CHRIS

S-52 Specification for chart contents

S-52 Ann 1 Guidance Update

S-52 Ann 2 Colours and Symbols

S-52 Ann 3 Glossary of Terms

S-57 IHO Transfer Standard

DGIWG ISO CIRM

HGE

International Organizations Involved in ECDIS

Navigation and Safety

Equipment & Testing

Chart Content, Display and Updating

Other Organizations

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• IMO – International Maritime Organization

• MSC – Maritime Safety Committee

• NAV – Safety of Navigation Sub-Committee

• IHO – International Hydrographic Organization

• WEND – Worldwide ENC Database

• CHRIS – Committee on Hydrographic Requirements for

Information Systems

International Organizations Involved in ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission

• TC80 – IEC Committee on Maritime Navigational Chart

Database

• WG 7 – IEC Working Group on ECDIS

• HGE – Harmonization Group on ECDIS

• DGIWG – Digital Geographic Informational Working

Group

• ISO – International Organization for Standards

• CIRM – Committee International Radio-Maritime

International Organizations Involved in ECDIS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

In 1998 IMO Resolution A.817(19) was amended by

Resolution MSC.86(70)

This Resolution added another new appendix to the annex to

Resolution A.817(19)

Appendix 7 - RCDS Mode of Operation

Adopted 8th December 1998

This states the requirements to permit the operation of ECDIS

equipment in RCDS mode in areas where no ENC chart

coverage is provided.

Resolution MSC.86(70)

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

The worlds first type approved ECDIS

system was certified by the German

organization BSH, to Transas in 1999.

ECDIS Type Approval

Navi-Sailor 2400

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

IEC 61174
In 2001 the International Electrotechnical Commission

(IEC) publishes a revision of International Standard IEC

61174

Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)

– Operational and Performance Requirements,

Methods of Testing and Required Test Results

Second Edition 2001-11

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

HSC Code

The first mandatory carriage requirement of

ECDIS was onboard High-Speed Craft as

follows:

• craft constructed on or after 1 July 2008;

• craft constructed before 1 July 2008, not

later than 1 July 2010.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

The Safety of Navigation Sub-Committee

meeting in 2006 (NAV52) taking into account

the technological progress and experience

gained recognized the need to improve the

previously adopted resolution A.817(19), as

amended, performance standards for ECDIS in

order to ensure the operational reliability of

such equipment.

NAV52

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Revised Performance Standards for Electronic Chart

Display and Information Systems (ECDIS)

Adopted on 5th December 2006

by IMO Resolution MSC.232(82)

Entered into force on 01 January 2009

IMO Resolution MSC.232(82)

Consists of 16 sections and 7 Appendix

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

IEC 61174

In 2008 the International Electrotechnical Commission

(IEC) publishes a revision of International Standard IEC

61174
Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)

– Operational and Performance Requirements,

Methods of Testing and Required Test Results

Edition 3.0 2000-09

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

NAV54

At the July 2008 meeting of the Safety

of Navigation Sub-Committee (NAV54)

agreement was reached on an

implementation schedule for

mandatory ECDIS on vessels.

With agreement having finally been reached, IMO

followed the necessary steps to add this requirement

to IMO's Safety Of Life At Sea (SOLAS) Convention.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

Regulation 19 – Carriage Requirements

2.1 All ships irrespective of size shall have:

2.1.4 nautical charts and nautical publications to plan and

display the ship’s route for the intended voyage and to plot

and monitor positions throughout the voyage; an Electronic

Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) is also

accepted as meeting the chart carriage requirements of this

subparagraph. Ships to which paragraph 2.10 applies shall

comply with the carriage requirements for ECDIS detailed

therein;

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

2.10 Ships engaged on international voyages shall be fitted

with an Electronic Chart Display and Information System

(ECDIS) as follows:

.1 passenger ships 500 gross tonnage and upwards

constructed on or after 1 July 2012;

.2 tankers of 3,000 gross tonnage and upwards

constructed on or after 1 July 2012;

.3 cargo ships, other than tankers, of 10,000

gross tonnage and upwards constructed on or after

1 July 2013;

.4 cargo ships, other than tankers, of 3,000 gross

tonnage and upwards but less than 10,000 gross

tonnage constructed on or after 1 July 2014;

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

.5 passenger ships 500 gross tonnage and upwards

constructed before 1 July 2012, not later than the first

survey on or after 1 July 2014;

.6 tankers of 3,000 gross tonnage and upwards

constructed before 1 July 2012, not later than the first

survey on or after 1 July 2015;

.7 cargo ships, other than tankers, of 50,000

gross tonnage and upwards constructed before 1

July 2013, not later than the first survey on or after 1 July

2016;

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

SOLAS Chapter V

.8 cargo ships, other than tankers, of 20,000

gross tonnage and upwards but less than 50,000

gross tonnage constructed before 1 July 2013,

not later than the first survey on or after 1 July 2017;

and

.9 cargo ships, other than tankers, of 10,000 gross

tonnage and upwards but less than 20,000 gross

tonnage constructed before 1 July 2013, not later

than the first survey on or after 1 July 2018;

2.11 Administrations may exempt ships from the

application of the requirements of paragraph 2.10

when such ships will be taken permanently out of

service within two years after the implementation

date specified in subparagraphs .5 to .9 of paragraph

2.10.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Structure of ECDIS

DATABASE

SENCs

MONITOR AND

CONTROLS

CPU

INPUT SENSORS

POSITION

(WGS84)

GYRO HEADING

SPEED LOG

ECDIS

Software

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ECDIS Configuration

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724TRANSAS Navi Philippine Seafarers Training Center -Sailor 3000 ECDIS
Configuration

NMEA 0183
GPS

WIND

YEOMAN

AUTOPILOT

ARPA X-Band

NMEA OUTPUT

ECDIS

LOG

GYRO

ECHO SOUNDER

WATER TEMP

NAVTEX

AIS

DGPS

VDR

ARPA S-Band

The NMEA 0183 Interface Standard defines

electrical signal requirements, data transmission

protocol and time, and specific sentence formats

for a serial data bus.

Most sentences begin with a $ followed by a two

character talker ID and three character sentence

identifier.

Exception is AIS which transmits a sentence

beginning with !

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Cycle of Operation

INPUT SENSORS

PC

MOUSE

MONITOR

OOW

LATITUDE

LONGITUDE

SPEED

COURSE

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Datums

• Datum used by Electronic Charts is WGS84

• The positioning system (GPS) must be set to WGS84

also, so that the ship is displayed in the correct

position on the chart display

• There will often be a different datum on the paper

chart. This difference is known as the datum shift.

Understanding of this difference is vital to safety

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

WGS 84

Position Shifts from Datum Differences in Comparison With WGS 84

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Definition of ECDIS

Electronic Chart Display and Information System

(ECDIS) means a navigation information system

which with adequate back-up arrangements can be

accepted as complying with the up-to-date chart

required by regulations V/19 and V/27 of the 1974

SOLAS Convention, as amended, by displaying

selected information from a system electronic

navigational chart (SENC) with positional

information from navigation sensors to assist the

mariner in route planning and route monitoring,

and if required display additional navigation-related

information.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Definition of ENC

Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) means the

database, standardized as to content, structure and

format, issued for use with ECDIS by or on the

authority of a Government, authorized Hydrographic

Office or other relevant government institution, and

conform to IHO standards. The ENC contains all the

chart information necessary for safe navigation and

may contain supplementary information in addition

to that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing

directions) which may be considered necessary for

safe navigation.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Definition of System ENC (SENC)

System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC) means

a database, in the manufacturer’s internal ECDIS

format, resulting from the lossless transformation of

the entire ENC contents and its updates. It is this

database that is accessed by ECDIS for the display

generation and other navigational functions, and is

equivalent to an up-to-date paper chart. The SENC

may also contain information added by the mariner

and information from other sources.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Displaying the ENC

DATA SOFTWARE DISPLAY

IHO S-57

IHO S-52

ENC Transformed into SENC

SENC

ENC 1

ENC 2

ENC 3

(PresLib Ed 3.4)

(ECDIS Kernel)

ENC
ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Definition of RCDS

Raster Chart Display System (RCDS) means a

navigation information system displaying

RNC’s with positional information from

navigation sensors to assist the mariner in

route planning and route monitoring, and if

required, display additional navigation-

related information.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Definition of RNC

Raster Navigational Chart (RNC) means a

facsimile of a paper chart originated by, or

distributed on the authority of, a

government-authorized hydrographic office.

RNC is used in these standards to mean

either a single chart or a collection of

charts.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Definition of System RNC (SRNC)

System Raster Navigational Chart Database

(SRNC) means a database resulting from the

transformation of the RNC by the RCDS to

include updates to the RNC by appropriate

means.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ECDIS / RCDS mode

ECDIS equipment

Type-approved?

Adequate ENC

coverage?

ENC with updates

onboard? ECDIS

RCDS

mode

RNC data and

service? RCDS capable?

ECS equipment ECS “Other” EC data

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes
No

No

No

No

No

RCDS mode does not have the full functionality of ECDIS, and can only be used

together with an appropriate portfolio of up-to-date paper charts.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Cell

An S-57 ENC chart is also called a cell which has a

defined geographical coverage and intended

navigational usage.

It is defined in ECDIS as the basic unit of ENC data

covering a defined geographical area bounded by two

meridians and two parallels.

Data of cells of the same usage do not overlap, enabling

a seamless chart display.

The size of a cell must not exceed 5 megabytes.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Projections

ENC chart cells come without geographic projection, only

defined coordinates. The ECDIS software provides the

geographic projection for display. The following

projections are typically provided:

None

Cylindrical (Mercator)

Cylindrical (Transverse Mercator)

RADAR Projection (Equidistant)

Orthographic

Stereographic

Gnomonic

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Projections

Cylindrical (Mercator)

– Tangent Equator

N
S

Cylindrical (Transverse Mercator)

– Tangent along meridian

(Good for higher Latitudes)

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Projections

A – Gnominic

B – Stereographic

C - Orthographic

AB

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Modes

Open sea

Coastal

Confined waters
(Confined waters includes narrow waters, harbour

areas, anchorage and pilotage areas)

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Display Base

Display Base means the chart content as listed

in appendix 2 of Resolution MSC.232(82) and

which cannot be removed from the display.

It is permanently retained on the display.

It is not intended to be sufficient for safe

navigation.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Standard Display

Standard Display is the display mode

intended to be used as a minimum during

route planning and route monitoring.

The chart content is listed in appendix 2 of

Resolution MSC.232(82).

Displayed at switch-on, recalled by single

operator action.
ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Appraisal

Use the digital chart catalogue

Planning

Create the route on updated charts

Check the route

Save the route

Passage / Route Planning

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Execution

Execute the route as planned

Monitoring

Monitor the vessels progress along the

planned route

Physically - by observation

Automatically - alarms on the ECDIS

Passage / Route Planning

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

The Operational Use of Electronic Chart Display

and Information Systems (ECDIS)

Part 2 – Principal Types of Electronic Charts (ENC & RNC)

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Electronic Charts

ARCS

BSB

ENC

Transas TX97

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

The Basic Difference

• Raster charts are simply bitmap images

created by scanning a paper chart

• Vector charts portray charted features as

points, lines, or areas with amplifying

information (attributes) found in an

associated database

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Digital Spatial Data

Raster

Vector

Real World

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Raster format charts are produced by :

Scanning the original paper charts

Raster Charts

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• A set of colored pixels

representing chart

information as a picture on

computer screen
• Simply an array of pixels

arranged in rows and columns

• Pixels are color coded, but do

not represent features

explicitly

Raster Charts

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• Looks like a paper chart

• Cheap and easy to produce

(scan existing paper chart)

• Runs easily on PC

• World-wide availability

The Appeal of Raster Charts

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

A Raster Chart

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 ARCS chart of River Humber, UK Philippine Seafarers Training Center

• An intelligent form of digital

geographic data where real world

objects are represented by points,

lines and polygons. An objects

representation is described by

attributes and coordinates.

• Examples include:

– Digitized Maps

– GIS Data

Vector Data

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Digital Vectorized Charts

Digital technology is used to develop

electronic charts from traditional paper

charts and directly from marine survey

data.

• Digitizer (in tabular form – old)

• Scan and digitize electronically

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Feature Entities

• simple point

• simple line

• simple polygon

• complex
River Spatial Data

Attribute Data

LENGTH WIDTH

2035.00 25.00

ID

2 525.00 18.00

#1 #2

A Feature consists of both the spatial data linked

with its attributes in a feature table.

Feature Entities

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Spatial Data Analysis

•
••

••

••

76

Lake

Features:

Line

Points:

Connected

Detached

Area

Text

Lake

Geographic data are separated

into themes and tiled for speed of

access

Network Analysis
Vector Data

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Layers of Information on a Vector Chart

Radar Tracks

Symbols

Bearing Lines

Depth Contours

Depth Numbers

Buoys, Lights

Obstacles

Basic Chart

Land Contours

Topography

Raw Radar

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

A Vector Chart

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 ENC chart of Subic Bay Freeport Philippine Seafarers Training Center –
Transas Navi-Sailor 2400

ENC Chart Usage

The S-57 standard classifies digital charts into six different types
of usage. The usage of a chart depends on the scale of its

source.

The six types of usage are:

1. Overview (Scale Range < 1:1,499,999)

2. General (Scale Range 1:350,000 – 1:1,499,999)

3. Coastal (Scale Range 1:90,000 – 1:349,999)

4. Approach (Scale Range 1:22,000 – 1:89,999)

5. Harbour (Scale Range 1:4,000 – 1:21,999)

6. Berthing (Scale Range > 1:4,000)

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Intended Usage

Navigational Purpose Definition for intended use

1 Overview For route planning and ocean crossing.

2 General For navigating oceans, approaching coasts and

route planning.

3 Coastal For navigating along the coastline, either inshore

or offshore.

4 Approach Navigating the approaches to ports or major

channels or through intricate or congested waters.

5 Harbour Navigating within ports, harbours, bays, rivers and

canals, for anchorages.

6 Berthing Detailed data to aid berthing.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Chart Display

Most ECDIS user interfaces only allow a selection of the

chart display by range or scale, and not by chart usage.

Like traditional radar ranges, display ranges define the

radius of a circular view around the centre of the

screen.

The diameter of the view coincides with the vertical

extent of the rectangular chart display.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Radar Overlay on ENC Charts

Radar Range Standard Scale (Rounded)

200 NM 1 : 3,000,000

96 NM 1 : 1,500,000

48 NM 1 : 700,000

24 NM 1 : 350,000

12 NM 1 : 180,000

6 NM 1 : 90,000

3 NM 1 : 45,000

1.5 NM 1 : 22,000

0.75 NM 1 : 12,000
0.5 NM 1 : 8,000

0.25 NM 1 : 4,000

Table of recommended ENC chart compilation scales to facilitate display of radar

video over official ENCs.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Chart Identification

Each official ENC is identified by an 8 character identifier

The first two characters indicate the Producer Code

The third digit indicates the Navigational Purpose

Followed by alpha-numeric unique identifier

GB100012 – United Kingdom, Overview

US2WC12M – United States, General (last character “M” = Metric)

FR301030 – France, Coastal

PH4SBY40 – Philippines, Approach

ES504451 – Spain, Harbour

SE6D17LA – Sweden, Berthing

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Underscale

In ECDIS the condition where data displayed are

not the largest scale NAVIGATIONAL PURPOSE

data available for that area.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Overscale

In ECDIS, to display the chart information at a display

scale larger than the compilation scale.

When the data displayed is from data of two different

navigational purposes the chart display will, where

drawn at a larger scale, include an overscale area of

data from the smaller scale cell in order to complete

the display. This area should be identified by the

“overscale pattern” of the presentation library.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Overscale

Overscale

chart cell

Overscale chart Singapore displayed on Maris ECDIS900 ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine
Seafarers Training Center

SCAMIN Attribute

The SCAMIN attribute of an object determines

the display scale below which the object must

no longer be displayed. Thereby the clutter on

the screen of an ECDIS is reduced.

For example a buoy with SCAMIN set to 50,000

will disappear from the ECDIS display when

zooming out and reducing the display scale

below 1:50,000.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Own Ship’s Safety Contour

In ECDIS the contour related to the own ship selected by the

mariner from the contours provided for in the SENC, to be

used by ECDIS to distinguish on the DISPLAY between the

safe and the unsafe water, and for generating anti-grounding

ALARMS

Unsafe Water Safe Water

Chart Datum

Shallow Contour

Deep Contour

Safety Contour (20m value existing in the SENC)

Safety Contour (16m input value by mariner)

Four colour depth contour scheme

..

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Own Ship’s Safety Contour

Safety Contour

Selected Safety Contour 16m

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Displayed Safety Contour 20m Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Safety Depth

In ECDIS the depth defined by the mariner, e.g. the ship’s

draft plus under keel clearance, to be used by the ECDIS to

emphasize soundings on the DISPLAY equal to or less than

this value

(Can not be less than Safety Contour value)

Unsafe Water Safe Water

Chart Datum

Shallow Contour

Deep Contour

Safety Contour (value existing in the SENC)

Safety Contour (selected by mariner)

Safety Depth

=> Safety Contour

Four colour depth contour scheme

..

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Safety Depth

Safety Depth

Selected Safety Depth 13m

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Highlighted Soundings = 13m or less Philippine Seafarers Training
Center

Two Colour Depth Scheme

Safe and unsafe waters can be displayed in

two different colours.

Unsafe Water Safe Water

Chart Datum

Safety Contour (20m value existing in the SENC)

Safety Contour (16m input value by mariner)

Safety Depth 17m

Two colour depth contour scheme

113 177

..

23

Shallow Contour 10m

Deep Contour 50m

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Two Colour Depth Scheme

Shallow Contour 10m

Deep Contour 50m

Safety Contour 20m

SAFE WATER

UNSAFE WATER

Safe and Unsafe waters

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Presentation Library

ENC data does not contain any information concerning

symbolizing; the presentation of the chart on the screen

and on the display is realized by using the presentation

library (PRESLIB) published in the Special Publication (S-

52).

Nav53 considered the issue of maintenance of ECDIS

software and agreed that proper maintenance of ECDIS

software was an important issue.

S/N.1/Circ.266 was issued on 22nd October 2007.

Preslib

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Presentation Library

In January 2007, Supplement No.1 to the IHO ENC

Product Specification was introduced in order to

include, within the ENC Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas

(PSSA) and Archipelagic Sea Lanes (ASL).

Any ECDIS which has not been upgraded to the latest

version of the Product Specification or the S-52

Presentation Library may be unable to correctly display

the latest charted features and may not meet the

chart carriage requirements as set out in SOLAS

regulation V/19.2.1.4.

S-52 Preslib Edition 3.4

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Alarm systems

Horizontal datum and chart projections

Chart features simplification

Look ahead capability

Orientation for information

Display of safety contour / depth

Colours may differ

Comparison of ECDIS/RCDS

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Comparison of ECDIS/RCDS

US BSB

Raster

Chart

US ENC

Vector

Chart

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Comparison of ECDIS/RCDS

Orange boarder

indicates RCDS

mode (Transas)
US BSB Raster charts displayed on Transas Navi-Sailor 3000 ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine
Seafarers Training Center

Comparison of ECDIS/RCDS

On a Raster chart lines become areas as

scale is increased by zooming in.

On a Vector chart lines are displayed as

lines irrespective of scale or zooming.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Chart Symbols

Obstruction (foul ground)

Obstruction as isolated danger

Wreck as isolated danger

Underwater rock as isolated danger

74 Wreck of known depth

Underwater Rock (awash)

If shallower

than safety

contour

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Official / Unofficial Charts

ENC

Unofficial data

(up to date official paper chart required)

Border of ENC chart displaying interface

between official and unofficial data

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Carry discs containing all ENC and RNC charts on

board and obtain a license or permit to unlock

newly required charts.

Chart services using email attachments and

internet access are becoming more common.

Maris MDS (Maritime Digital Service)

Admiralty AVCS (Admiralty Vector Chart Service)

Obtaining New Charts

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Admiralty Digital Catalogue

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 UKHO Admiralty Digital Catalogue (AVCS) Philippine Seafarers Training
Center

At the 16th International Hydrographic

Conference, (Monaco 14-19 April 2002), the IHO

Member States accepted the “SENC Delivery

Option”, thus allowing that ENC data be

distributed in a proprietary SENC format.

Transas (SENC service)

SevenC’s (Direct ENC)

SENC Delivery

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Update/New CD of all charts every three months

AVCS includes free back-up copy

Pay to view, permit for 3 months

Update current passage (Working Folio) charts at sea

via satellite

Update other charts (Standing Folio) in port via

internet or from update CD

Subscriptions include Updates

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Chart Coverage

British Admiralty ENC chart of Dover Straits - Maris ECDIS900

Check country coverage when

ordering charts.

In this example order French chart to

complete coverage of Dover Straits.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Correcting Charts Automatically

SEMI-AUTOMATIC UPDATING

In ECDIS, the application of corrections to ENC data

in the SENC updating in a fully integrated state, by

hard media or telecommunications transfer in a

manner which requires human intervention at the

ECDIS interface.

FULLY AUTOMATIC UPDATING

In ECDIS the application of corrections to ENC data

in the SENC in a fully integrated state, without

human intervention.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC Update History

Red highlight showing

applied correction to
coastline

Displaying Update History to Chart GB489110 on Maris ECDIS900

GB489110 Ed.2

Update 2

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Correcting Charts Manually

MANUAL UPDATING

In ECDIS, the manual application of corrections to ENC

data in the SENC by human operator, usually based on

unformatted update information (such as Notices to

Mariners, voice radio, verbal communications, etc.).

The manual application of hand corrections to nautical

charts.

LOCAL UPDATES

In ECDIS a generic term used to indicate all update

information other than Official Updates, regardless of

source; for application as a Manual Update only as

opposed to automatic updates.

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

Manually Updated Chart

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

S-57 ENC
– S-57 Edition 3.0 published Nov 1996

– “frozen” for 4 yrs + 2 additional years

– S-57 3.1 issued Dec 2000

– S-57 Edition 4.0 (not released)

– S-57 Edition 3.1.1

– S-57 Maintenance Document (Cumulative)

Number 8

Current S-57 Standards

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

ENC chart coverage is still not entirely global.

However, the UKHO who operate the Admiralty

Vector Chart Service (AVCS) said it hoped to be

able to cover 2,000 of the world’s top ports, which

account for 98% of the world’s tonnage by the end

of 2008.

AVCS provides navigators with an integrated set of

electronic navigational charts (ENC’s) schemed in

folios along the major shipping routes covering the

world’s top ports.

Current Status – ENC Coverage

ECDS Revision 1.21 20090724 Philippine Seafarers Training Center

The IHO is in the process of developing an IHO Geospatial

Information Infrastructure. The core component of this will

be the S-100 Geospatial Standard for Hydrographic Data

and its associated information registry.

S-101 is intended to be the next generation ENC product

specification. It will be based on S-100. The reason for

moving to S-101 is to have a more flexible standard so that

the IHO can react quickly to changes.

However, the IHO stated during the 3rd ECDIS Stakeholders

Forum in November 2007 that S-101 ENC will not affect S- 57 based ECDIS for the next 10 to 15
years.

Electronic Chart Display

and Information

Systems

Objectives:

Become familiar with the principal types of

electronic charts.

Understand the difference between an ECDIS

and an ECS.

Understand the different Electronic Chart

formats and their advantages and

disadvantages.

Objectives:

Become familiar with the display characteristics of

an ECDIS System.
Understand the limits of an ECDIS based on the

performance limits of sensors.

Understand the US Navy policy and plan on ECDIS

Systems.

Understand the risk of over reliance on an ECDIS

System.

Background

Electronic databases, operating systems,

computer technology and the widespread

deployment of Digital technology has made it

possible to employ electronic charts at sea.

In addition, the advent of continuous and

automated positioning systems (such as GPS),

have made it possible to take maximum

advantage of electronic charting.

The benefits of the integrated system

GPS and chart data in digital format

include:

- Real time position .

- Automated plotting of the navigation.

- Reduce Manning

- Minimizing Human error .

- Alert to navigation dangers.

- Dramatically increase awareness in low

visibility.

Electronic Charting Systems

Advances in technology have made it

possible to replace the traditional paper

charts with Electronic Charting Systems.

All electronic charting systems fall into two

categories. The two categories are:

ECDIS (Electronic Charting and Display System)

ECS (Electronic Charting System).

Electronic Chart Display & Information

System (ECDIS)

“means a navigation information system which,

with adequate back-up arrangements, can be

accepted as complying with the up-to-date chart

requirements by regulation V/20 of the 1974

SOLAS Convention, by displaying selected

information from a system navigational chart

(SENC) with positional information from

navigation sensors to assist the mariner in route

planning and route monitoring, and by displaying

additional navigation-related information if

required.”

Sec. 2.1 IMO PS

And that means????

The short explanation is an ECDIS is a

system that is able to display electronic

chart information with:

- automatic position updates

- built in redundancy

- that will assist the mariner in all aspects

of

Navigation.

It is the legal equivalent of a paper chart.

It is Not an ECDIS if…..

Equipment is not legally approved.

Does not have adequate electronic chart

coverage.

Does not have chart updating capability.

Even though an ECS may perform many of the

same functions as an ECDIS, it is not the

legal equivalent of an ECDIS. It may only

be used for “situational awareness”.

What makes up an ECDIS or ECS?

Position inputs (GPS, DGPS, LORAN, Radar,

gyro, fathometer, etc.)

Electronic Navigation Charts (ENC)

System Electronic Navigation Charts (SENC)

Electronic Navigational Chart

(ENC)

“means the database, standardized as to content,

structure and format, issued for use with ECDIS

on the authority of government-authorized

hydrographic offices. The ENC contains all the

chart information necessary for safe navigation,

and may contain supplementary information in

addition to that contained in the paper chart (e.g.,

sailing directions) which may be considered

necessary for safe navigation.”

Sec. 2.2, IMO PS

So What?

An ENC is a database, not a chart as

you think of it. As such, there are:

different types of ENC data

various formats

differences in the level of content

System ENC (SENC)

“means the database resulting from the

transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for

appropriate use, updates to the ENC by

appropriate means, and other data added by the

mariner. It is this database that is actually

accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and

other navigational functions, and is the equivalent

of an up-to-date paper chart. The SENC may also

contain information from other sources.”

Sec. 2.3, IMO PS

System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC)

Not all charts are equal….

Many different formats exist for electronic charts.

The two major types are vector based and raster

charts.

Raster charts are scanned paper charts.

Most vector charts are digitized paper charts,

thereby inheriting any errors (and possibly

introducing some!)

Countries are producing unique digital charts

based on their interpretation of IHO standards.

ENC

DNC®

BSB

ARCS

C-MAP

Navionics

Transas
The Types of EC Formats are:

Raster and Vector

NIMA

Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC®)

IHO S-57

Electronic

Navigational Chart

(ENC)

NOAA

Raster Nautical

Chart (RNC)

Digital Chart Formats

The Basic Difference

Raster charts are simply bitmap images

created by scanning a paper chart

Vector charts portray charted features as

points, lines, or areas with amplifying

information (attributes) found in an

associated database

Raster Charts

A set of colored pixels

representing chart

information as a picture

on computer screen

Simply an array of pixels

arranged in rows and

columns

Pixels are color coded, but

do not represent features

explicitly

The Appeal of Raster

Looks like a paper chart

(appeals to traditionalists)

Cheap and easy to produce

(scan existing paper chart)

Runs easily on PC

World-wide availability
Vector Charts: More detail

A set of accurately

positioned lines (vectors),

points and areas, with

associated attributes (e.g.

“shoreline”, “buoy - red”)

organized in a database

accessed by clicking on

displayed symbol

Paradigm Shift

Looks “different” from a

paper chart

Underlying database allows

queries and layer selection

Zooming reveals detail

Complex, expensive, and

time-consuming to produce

Needs more powerful

computer and expensive

display to meet IHO/DoD

requirements

USN Approach is to use NIMA’s Digital

Nautical Chart (DNC), a vector based format.

DNC with Base data only

showing (Less clutter)

Standard Display with Depth Contours

The user defines what features

are necessary!!!

Standard Display with Spot Soundings

DNC with User defined Color

All Features

Which is better?

Depends on your point of view….

Raster is easier and cheaper to produce, but

vector provides much more information to

the navigator

DoD standard is Vector Product Format

--DNC®

NOAA BSB charts cover US waters

The Advantages of Vector Charts

Information on Chart can be linked to

specific points. (Click on light and you can

retrieve more info, like a picture of the

light)

Allows the user to display the information

that is necessary for the ship’s current

mission.

Raster Concerns

High scan resolution required for detailed

chart….lot’s of CPU memory required and

slower refresh rates.

Zooming degrades quality.

Mixed pixels—is it water or land?

Raster Model

Land

Shoreline

Water

Vector Shoreline
US Navy Policy

The Chief of naval Operation ( CNO) issued a directive in

march 1998 establishing minimum ECDIS standards

(ECDIS-N) and calling for a transition of the entire Navy fleet

from paper based charts to electronic digital Chart by FY

2007. This has recently changed to 2004, with the first

ECDIS-N certified battlegroup deploying in FY01.

Until then, ships may use an ECS for enhanced situational

awareness, but the paper chart must be maintained as well.

USN ECDIS-N Requirements

Navy standard, automated and

continuous positioning systems

Display of radar, visual and celestial

navigation fix information

Ability to read and display National

Imagery and Mapping Agency

(NIMA) Digital Nautical Charts

(DNCs)

System-to-system interoperability

The US Navy Approach

Several Different Programs including

NAVSSI (USN), NAVSSI-Lite, and

VMS/IBS.

All programs will use NIMA’s Digital

Nautical Charts.

Most systems will also be able to read raster

charts.

ECDIS-N Platforms

169 combatants scheduled for

NAVSSI/NAVSSI Lite, including

NIMITZ class aircraft carriers,

ARLEIGH BURKE class destroyers,

TICONDEROGA class cruisers,

WASP class amphibious assault

ships and Perry class frigates.

Virginia class SSN will employ

ECDIS-N software for its

Navigation Data Distribution and

Display (ND3) system.

13 FAMOUS class cutters.

There is potential for

installation on other cutters.

Visual Bearing LOP Fix

Radar Range LOP Fix

Piloting Guidance

Automatically calculates:

cross-track error

recommended course to

steer accounting for

set/drift

nearest hazard

next navigation aid

depth

distance and time to turn

Military standard navigation report

Tabular turnpoint solution data

Tide and Current Information

Displayed on the chart…

…and graphically in

pop-up windows.
The Risks of ECDIS

ECDIS is only a tool that helps a mariner

safely and effectively navigate a ship.

It is not the end-all be-all to ship navigation.

One of the biggest risks with the transition

to ECDIS is an over reliance in the

information provided

Some things to consider…

Poor GPS performance

DGPS used/not used

ECDIS malfunction

installation setup

ENC compilation errors (e.g., datums)

chart (errors, omissions, out-dated)

survey errors

human error
Any Questions?

SUBJECT: Navigation 6 – Operational use of ECDIS

MODULE No. 01

Topic: Sensor inputs and Electronic charts

Time Frame: Week 2

Lesson 2: Sensor inputs and Electronic charts.

I. INTRODUCTION

An Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) is a computer-based

navigation system that complies with IMO regulations and can be used as an alternative to

paper navigation charts. Integrating a variety of real-time information, it is an automated

decision aid capable of continuously determining a vessel’s position in relation to land, charted

objects, navigation aids and unseen hazards.

An ECDIS includes electronic navigational charts (ENC) and integrates position information

from the Global Positioning System (GPS) and other navigational sensors, such as radar,

fathometer and automatic identification systems (AIS). It may also display additional navigation-

related information, such as sailing directions.

At the end of this lesson, you are expected to:

• Discuss the appropriate, unambiguous and accurate sensor data use on ECDIS.

• Discuss the differences between the electronic chart system (ECS) and ECDIS, its

various data format including CATZOC that has been used in safe navigation.

II. INSTRUCTIONS

1. You are required to be attentive to the lesson presented and ready to take notes.

2. The topic requires a lot of reading. Patience is the key in order to cope up in

understanding this lesson.

3. You need a Laptop, Ipad or cell phone that can play videos or personal computer

and accessories, notebook, writing materials and all things you may need for online

class.

4. Your activity this week are: Sensor inputs and electronic charts.
5. Please follow instructions. You may ask questions through Google classroom

stream, my messenger “Buenamado Ordonio”, or Messenger group chat or even

call me on my cell phone 09999805861. Please bear with me because I am

attending to many students and be patient to wait when I will be able to reply your

concern.

III. LESSON

A. PRESENTATION OF THE LESSON

Please proceed to the Google Classroom under classwork, take your activity and

reading materials under Module 1, lesson 2, sensor inputs and electronic charts.

B. DISCUSSION

Discussion to be held during your virtual hour. Recorded video of the discussion will be

posted on your stream for those unable to join.

C. ACTIVITY

Go to Google Classroom and under classwork, Lesson 2. Download lessons.

Accomplish activities posted.

D. SUMMARY

Types of ECDIS charts

1. Raster Chart (RNC): RNCs are direct copy or a scan of the paper charts. It looks identical

to a paper chart as all the information shown is directly printed. The chart only grows

larger or smaller as per the zooming and when rotated, everything rotates.

2. Vector Chart (ENC): ENCs are computer generated charts. The details on an ENC can be

turned on and off depending on the requirement of the user. Objects on the ENC can be

clicked for more details on the same. Depths can also be monitored to obtain a warning

with regard to grounding. When zooming, the features grow large or small but the text

remains the same.

ECDIS covered under the following

1. SOLAS Chapter 5

2. Port State Control Requirements

3. IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS

4. S 52 Standard (Display Standard)

5. S 57 Standard (Compilation Standard)

6. S 63 Standard (IHO Data Protection/Encryption Standard)

ENC (Electronic Navigational Chart) Layers

 Display Base (No information can be deleted)

 Standard Display

 Full Display

 Custom Display

Minimum Interface Requirement

 Position Sensor

 Heading Sensor

 Speed Sensor

ECDIS Compliance

 Approved ECDIS with approved backup

 Type approved hardware

 Type approved software

 Approved installation

 Official Chart Services

 Training of Officers

Chart Updating

Updates to the ECDIS charts may reach the ship in various ways, depending upon the

capabilities of the service provider and the onboard communication facilities.

 On data distribution media (DVD)

 As an email attachment (SATCOM)

 As a broadcast message via SATCOM plus additional communication hardware

 As an internet download
E. EVALUATION

Essay test

IV. MATERIALS, REFERENCES

PPT and word reading materials. Videos

NAVI-SAILOR
4000/4100 ECDIS
(VERSION 2.00.009)

USER MANUAL
© Transas Ltd. March, 2009
© 2009 Transas Ltd. All rights reserved.

The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas Ltd. and shall not be duplicated in whole or in part.
The technical details contained in this manual are the best that are available at the date of issue but are subject
to change without notice.

Transas Ltd. pursues the policy of continuous development. This may lead to the product described in this
manual being different from the product delivered after its publication.

The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
This document contains:

Preamble.................................................................................................................. 7

Annotation.........................................................................................................9

List of Documents............................................................................................9

Definitions and Abbreviations....................................................................... 10

Definitions............................................................................................. 10

Abbreviations........................................................................................ 12

Printing House Conventions......................................................................... 14

Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface...................................................................... 15

ECDIS User Interface Structure................................................................... 17

User Interface Components.......................................................................... 17

Panels.................................................................................................... 17

Pages.............19

Control Panel Windows....................................................................... 19

List Box Menu....................................................................................... 20

Text Boxes............................................................................................ 20

Buttons.................................................................................................. 20

Radio Buttons 21

Indicators............................................................................................... 21

Progress Bars....................................................................................... 21

ECDIS Task Control Panel........................................................................... 22

Abbreviations Used in the User Interface................................................... 27

Use of Uniform Measurement Units............................................................ 28

Keyboard......................................................................................................... 28

Chapter 2. ECDIS Task Turning On/Off.......................................................... 33

Turning the ECDIS Task On......................................................................... 35

Turning the ECDIS Task Off......................................................................... 36

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control........................................................................ 39

Transfer of Rights.......................................................................................... 41

Turning On/Off Control Panel Display on the ECDIS Task Screen.........42

Setting Control Panel Windows Display...................................................... 42

ECDIS Task Screen Configuration.............................................................. 43

Setting of Screen Colour Palette........................................................ 43

Switching the Graphic Cursor Type................................................... 44

Setting of Screen Boundaries Re-Draw as the Ship Symbol

Approaches Them................................................................................ 44

Chart Panel Settings...................................................................................... 44

Setting of Main and Dual Panel Displays..........................................44

Setting of Ship Symbol on the Chart Panel by the Cursor Position 46

Setting Chart Panel Orientation......................................................... 47

Setting Ship Symbol Motion Modes................................................... 47

Setting Ship Display and Its Motion Parameters

on the ECDIS Task Screen................................................................ 48

Setting of the Lengths of the Own Ship and Targets Vectors........49

Setting Time Zone.......................................................................................... 49

Setting Current Time Zone................................................................. 50

Setting Time Zone Change................................................................. 50

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual 1

Use of ECDIS Task Tools............................................................................. 51

Return of Own Ship Symbol Display to the ECDIS Task Screen..51

Viewing Charts..................................................................................... 51

ERBL..................................................................................................... 52

EBL/VRM 53

Index Lines............................................................................................ 54

Zoom...................................................................................................... 55

Manual Entry in the Ship Log............................................................. 56

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks............................................................................. 57

Setting Position Sources............................................................................... 59

Setting Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS)..........................59

Setting ER Mode.................................................................................. 62

Setting DR Mode.................................................................................. 64

Use of Manually Fix Position for Determining Ship Position..........65

Setting Heading Source................................................................................. 70

Setting Speed Sources.................................................................................. 71

Setting Speed Source Through the Water........................................ 72

Setting Speed Source Over the Ground........................................... 72

Setting Depth Source..................................................................................... 73

Obtaining Current Information about Navigational Data...........................74

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode..........................76

Loading Route...................................................................................... 76
Loading Schedule................................................................................ 79

Obtaining Current Information about Monitoring Route and Schedule 81

Handling Charts and Chart Information....................................................... 84

Prompt Search and Load Charts....................................................... 84

Loading and Scaling Charts under Own Ship Position...................85

Switching Chart Information Layers................................................... 90

Handling ENC Format Charts............................................................. 92

Trial Manoeuvre.............................................................................................. 93

Simulator ARPA Targets............................................................................... 97

Setting Training Targets...................................................................... 97

Editing Simulator Target Motion Vectors.......................................... 99

Deleting Simulator Targets...............................................................100

Using the Predictor......................................................................................101

Using the Curved Heading Line.................................................................102

Planning Turn with the Aid of Curved Heading Line.....................103

Use of Curved Heading Line for Turning in to a Route.................106

Using Docking Mode....................................................................................107

Using Auto Zoom Function.........................................................................112

Search and Rescue Operations.................................................................113

Using Man Overboard (MOB) Mode...............................................113

Creating SAR Routes........................................................................114

Using Special Purpose Objects..................................................................121

SPO Creating.....................................................................................121

SPO Deleting......................................................................................122

Other Functions..................................................................................123

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters......................................................125

Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the Schedule..................127

Monitoring of Safety Alarms.......................................................................129

Setting of Safety Parameters for the Detection of Dangerous Objects 129

Setting of Safety Parameters in the Sailing in the Vicinity

of Dangerous Objects........................................................................131

Monitoring of Crossing of Area Limits in Basic and Additional Groups 131

Monitoring of Navigational Alarms.............................................................132

Monitoring of Time.......................................................................................134

Setting of End-of-Watch Alerts.........................................................134

Setting of the Timer...........................................................................134

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions............................................................137

Using Ship Logbook....................................................................................139

Work with Archive........................................................................................143

Ship Logbook Printout.................................................................................144

Using Electronic System Logbook.............................................................146

Watch Schedule Editing..............................................................................149

Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task..........................................................150

Setting Track Display Elements.......................................................150

Viewing Archive Tracks.....................................................................151

Chapter 7. Manual Updating...........................................................................153

Turning On/Off the Display of Updating Objects and Their Attributes. .155
Creating and Plotting Updating Objects....................................................156

Selection of the Object Category and Type...................................157

Assigning Attributes to the Selected Object...................................158

Plotting of the Selected Object.........................................................158

Assigning “Attached File” Attribute..................................................160

Editing Updating Objects............................................................................161

Editing Point Type Objects...............................................................161

Editing Line, Area and Circle Type Objects...................................165

Editing Object Coordinates...............................................................168

Deleting Updating Object..................................................................169

Restore the Deleted Object..............................................................170

Search for Updating Objects......................................................................172

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts..............................................................175

Creating and Saving User Charts..............................................................177

Creating and Plotting User Chart Objects......................................177

Saving the User Chart.......................................................................181

Turning On/Off the Display of Updating Objects and Their Attributes 182

Editing User Chart Objects.........................................................................182

Editing Point Type Objects...............................................................182

Editing Line, Circle and Area Type Objects...................................186

Editing User Chart Object Coordinates...........................................190

Deleting the User Chart Object........................................................191

Restore the Deleted User Chart Object..........................................193

Merging Two User Charts...........................................................................194

Deleting User Charts...................................................................................196

Search for User Chart Objects...................................................................197

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual 3

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes.......................................................................199

Creating a Route..........................................................................................201

Graphic Method..................................................................................203

Tabular Method..................................................................................206

Route Loading and Unloading....................................................................208

Fast Route Search.......................................................................................210

Route Editing................................................................................................211

Graphic Route Editing Method.........................................................211

Tabular Method of Route Editing.....................................................214

Route Approval and Protection..................................................................218

Protecting Route from Editing..........................................................218

Route Approval..................................................................................219

Creating Reciprocal Route..........................................................................220

Merging Routes............................................................................................221

Deleting a Route...........................................................................................222

Transmitting Route to an External Device................................................223

Checking and Editing the Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation 224

Viewing Dangers to Navigation........................................................226

Editing Route if Dangers to Navigation are Detected...................226

Displaying Route Parameters as Excel Table..........................................228

Drawing Schedules......................................................................................229

Editing a Schedule.......................................................................................233
Deleting Schedules......................................................................................236

Quick Distance Calculator...........................................................................237

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 239

Radar Overlay...............................................................................................241

Work with Radar Overlay..................................................................241

Distance and Bearing Offset............................................................243

ARPA.............................................................................................................245

Target Display....................................................................................245

ARPA Settings....................................................................................246

AIS 252

Handling AIS Targets........................................................................252

Setting of Voyage Data.....................................................................255

Transmission of Messages in AIS System.....................................257

Reception of Messages in AIS System...........................................259

Requesting Information from AIS Objects......................................262

Replying to an Inquiry with the Use of Long Range

Communication Facilities..................................................................263

Handling Targets..........................................................................................266

Setting of Safety Parameters in the Tracking of Targets..............266

Handling Target Table.......................................................................266

Prompt Target Search.......................................................................267

Turning On Mode of Associating AIS and ARPA Targets............268

Turning On DR Mode for AIS Targets.............................................269

Filtering Lost Targets.........................................................................270

Filtering AIS Targets..........................................................................271

Sleeping AIS Targets Handling........................................................273

Obtaining Information on Target......................................................274

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task........................275

Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects.......................................277

Obtaining Information on Point Type Objects................................277

Obtaining Information on Line and Area Type Objects.................278

Obtaining Information on Vector Charts...................................................279

Obtaining Information on Updating Objects.............................................280

Obtaining Information on User Chart Objects..........................................281

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents..........................................282

Obtaining Information on the Change of Tidal Heights.................282

Display of Tidal Heights on the Chart Panel..................................286

Obtaining Information on Tidal Currents.........................................287

Obtaining Information on Surface Currents....................................288

Use of Animation................................................................................289

Obtaining Current System Information......................................................291

Obtaining Information on Ports..................................................................293

Obtaining Information by Port Name...............................................293

Obtaining Information by the Region Name...................................294

Obtaining Information by the Country Name..................................295

Obtaining Information by the Cursor Position on the Chart Panel 296

Quick Search for Selected Port........................................................298

Obtaining NAVTEX Information.................................................................298

Work with NAVTEX Message Database.........................................299

Work with Messages.........................................................................301

Obtaining Information on Own Ship AIS Data..........................................304

Obtaining Information on Currently Licence.............................................305

Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages...................................306

Display of Data Flow Between the NS 4000 MFD

and Different External Devices........................................................307

COM Trace Record...........................................................................307

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual 5
PREAMBLE

Preamble provides general information

on the work with document.

Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Annotation

ANNOTATION

The aim of this book is to provide the user with guidelines in the solution of
various tasks, which may arise during the voyage, and to give the user
some ideas of the operating principles and capabilities of ECDIS task.

The description is divided into 11 parts:

Chapter 1 ECDIS User Interface.

Chapter 2 ECDIS Task Turning On/Off.

Chapter 3 ECDIS Task Control.

Chapter 4 Navigation Tasks.

Chapter 5 Setting of Safety Parameters.

Chapter 6 Using Logging Functions.

Chapter 7 Manual Updating.

Chapter 8 Handling of User Charts.

Chapter 9 Handling of Routes.

Chapter 10 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units.

Chapter 11 Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task.

LIST OF DOCUMENTS
Navi-Sailor 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual.

Navi-Sailor 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). Functional Description.

Navi-Sailor 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). Additional Functions.

Navi-Sailor 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). Quick Reference.

Navi-Sailor 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). Installation Guide.

Navi-Sailor 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). Utilities.

Navi-Sailor 4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). Special Functions.

Preamble 9
Definitions and Abbreviations

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Cie Colour Calibration

Procedure to confirm that the colour specified in S-52, appendix 2 is

correctly reproduced on the ECDIS display.

Common Reference System

Sensor input data, providing identical and obligatory reference pertaining to

position, course, heading, bearing, speed, velocity, etc. and horizontal
datum to different subsystems within an navigation system.

Compilation Scale

Scale with which the chart information meets the IHO requirements for chart accuracy.

It is established by the producing hydrographic office and encoded in the ENC.

Corrupted Data

ENC data produced according to the S-57 ENC product specification, but
altered or modified during production, transmission, or retrieval.

Degrade

Reduce the quantity or quality of information content.

Display Redraw Time

Interval from when the display starts to change until the new display is complete.

Display Regeneration Time

Interval from operator action until the consequent redraw is complete.

Display Scale

The Ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the

ground, normalised and expressed as, for example, 1:10 000.

ENC Cell

Geographic division of ENC data for distributing purposes. For further

information, refer to the ENC product specification in S-57.

ENC Data

Electronic navigational chart (ENC) means the database, standardised

as to content, structure and format, issued for use with ECDIS on the
authority of government authorised hydrographic offices. The ENC
contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may
contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the
paper chart (e.g. sailing directions) which may be considered necessary
for safe navigation.

The content, structure and format of the ENC are specified in S-57,
including the associated ENC product specification.

ENC Test Data Set

Standardised data set supplied on behalf of the IHO that is necessary to

accomplish IEC testing requirements for ECDIS. This data set is encoded
according

to the S-57 ENC product specification and contains update

information based on S-52, appendix 1.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Definitions and Abbreviations

Non-ENC Data

Data not conforming to ENC data.

Overscale

Display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the compilation scale.
Overscaling may arise from deliberate overscaling by the mariner, or from automatic
overscaling by ECDIS in compiling a display when the data included is at various scales.

Presentation Library

Implementation of the display specifications in S-52, appendix 2 “Colour and

Symbol Specifications for ECDIS”, by de-coding and symbolising the SENC.
It contains:

the ECDIS symbol library, including the IEC navigation symbols;

the ECDIS colour tables for day, dusk, and night viewing;

look-up tables, linking SENC objects to the appropriate colour and symbology;

conditional symbology procedures for:

– cases where symbolising depends on circumstances, such as the

mariner’s choice of;

– safety contour;

– cases where symbolising is too complex to be defined in a direct look-up table.

description of symbology instructions;

mariner’s navigation objects, specified in the same format as chart

objects for convenience of processing in ECDIS;

supplementary features, for example ECDIS chart colour differentiation

test diagrams and colour calibration software.

The presentation library is available in hard-copy or in digital form. The

symbols shall be replicated in size and shape, using any convenient
format. The colour tables shall be reproduced within the tolerances given in
S-52, appendix 2/5.2.3. The remaining items may be implemented in any
convenient form which produces the same results as the presentation
library.
Single Operator Action

Single operation shall be achieved by activating a hardkey or softkey,

including any necessary cursor movement.

RNC Data

Raster Navigational Chart (RNC) means a facsimile of a paper chart

originated by, or distributed on the authority of, a government-authorised
hydrographic office.

RNC is used in these standards to mean either a single chart or a collection of charts.

The content, structure and format of the RNC are specified in S-61.

RNC Test Data Set

Standardised data set supplied on behalf of the IHO that is necessary to

accomplish IEC testing requirements for RCDS mode of operation. This
data set is encoded according to the S-61 RNC product specification. Test
RNC’s are specified

by the HO providing the RNC service or on whose behalf the RNC

service is provided.

Preamble 11
Definitions and Abbreviations

Abbreviations

AIS – Automatic Identification System;

ARCS – Admiralty Raster Chart System;

ARPA – Automatic Radar Plotting Aid;

BWW – Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint;

BTW – Bearing to Way Point;

CPP – Controllable Pitch Propeller;

CM – Chart Manager Utility;

CMG – Course Made Good;

COG – Course Over Ground;

CPA – Closest Point of Approach;

СTW – Course Through Water;

DIST – Distance;

DGPS – Differential Global Positioning System;

DR – Dead Reckoning;

DTW – Distance to Way Point;

EBL – Electronic Bearing Line;

ECDIS – Electronic Chart Display and Information System;

ENC – Electronic Navigational Chart;

EP – Estimated Position;

EPFS – Electronic Position-Fixing System;

ER – Echo Reference;

ERBL – Electronic Range and Bearing Line;

ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival;

ETD – Estimated Time of Departure;

FPP – Fixed Pitch Propeller;

GLO (DGLO) – Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite System (Differential

Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite System);

GLONASS (DGLONASS) – Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite

System (Differential Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite System);

GMT – Greenwich Mean Time;

GNSS (DGNSS) – Global Navigation Satellite System (Differential

Global Navigation Satellite System);

GPS – Global Positioning System;

GZ – Guard Zone;

HDG – Heading;

HO – Hydrographic Office;

IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission;

IHO – International Hydrographic Organisation;

IMO – International Maritime Organisation;

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Definitions and Abbreviations

INFO – Information;

LOP – Line of Position;

m – metre;

min – minute;

MFD – Multi Functional Display;

MMSI – Maritime Mobile Service Identities;

MOB – Man Overboard;

MSF – Midship Frame;

NAVTEX – Navigational Telex;

NM – nautical mile;

NMEA – National Marine Electronics Association;

NS – Navi-Sailor;

PS – Positioning System;

PTA – Planning Time of Arrival;

RIB – Radar Integrated Board;

RL – Rhumb Line;

RMS – Route Mean Square (error);

RNC – Raster Navigational Chart;

RPM – Revolution per Minute;

SAR – Search and Rescue;

s – second;

SENC – System Electronic Navigational Chart;

SMG – Speed Made Good;

SOG – Speed over Ground;

SOLAS – Safety of Life at Sea;

Stand – standard;
STG – Speed to Go;

STW – Speed Through Water;

TCPA – Time to Closest Point of Approach;

TTG – Time to Go;

UKС – Under Keel Clearance;

UTC – Universal Time Coordinated;

VRM – Variable Range Marker;

WGS-84 – World Geodetic Datum;

WPT – Way Point;

XTD – Cross Track Distance.

Preamble 13
Printing House Conventions

PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

Sample of notation Usage comments

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100
ECDIS To highlight names of documents

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION

Alarm Management To highlight sections of a document

Ahead To highlight, in a printed document, user interface

elements and the ECDIS task objects

*.pdf To highlight messages, commands, files and other

Windows OS information

<Enter> To highlight names of keyboard keys

“Main” To highlight names of windows, pages, buttons, etc.

TASKS LIST To highlight menu items

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
CHAPTER 1

ECDIS User Interface

This chapter describes principles of building

the ECDIS user Interface.

Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
ECDIS User Interface Structure

ECDIS USER INTERFACE STRUCTURE

In the ECDIS task, to enable the display of electronic charts and

associated information, “Main” and “Dual” panels are used. The essential
and other data and control tools are arranged on the Control panel. The
rest of information and functionality for the control of the ECDIS
environment is contained on functional panels. The panel layout can be
presented diagrammatically as shown below:

USER INTERFACE COMPONENTS

Panels

There is direct access to panels from the task. For ECDIS task, this is
primarily the Control panel, which shows operational information and
contains the most important task controls.

In ECDIS task, apart from the Control panel there are 14 functional
panels, each designed for its special purpose within the ECDIS task:
Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface 17
User Interface Components

Panels (except the Control panel) are switched with tabs in the bottom part of the screen.

For the operator’s convenience, the system implements a function for saving

the current condition of “Main” chart panel when the functional panels are switched.

This function’s operation can be shown in a table:

Panel name To open panel To switch the open

panel with the tab

Add Info L K

AIS S H

Charts P K

Config P P

Ice Charts L K

Log Book P K

Manual Correction L K

Monitoring P P

Navigation P P

NavTex Viewer L K

Route Editor L* K

Seetrac S H

Targets S H

Tasks L K

where:

– the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel is saved, along

with the last orientation (North/Head/Course) and motion
(True/Relative) settings which were made on this panel
before;

– the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel which was set on this panel
before it is saved; orientation setting is North, motion setting is True;

– the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel which was set

in the previous active functional panel is saved; orientation

setting is North, motion setting is True;

L* – for “Route Editor” panel only: if a route has been selected, the
focusing on the edited route is made automatically;

– the ship is displayed on the screen, Ahead function performed

automatically; the last Chart panel orientation
(North/Head/Course) and motion (True/Relative) settings are
retained;

P – the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel is saved, along

with the last orientation (North/Head/Course) and motion (True/Relative)

settings which were made on the previous active functional panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

User Interface Components

Pages

If functionality, which the panel is intended for, is rather extensive, for the convenience
sake it is divided into pages. The purpose of pages corresponds to the individual tasks
within the panel functionality. In the ECDIS task panels are divided into pages. They are
switched by using tabs in the top part of the panel, which they belong to. Shown below is
“Navigation” panel with pages intended for selection of essential information sensors:
“Ship Position”, “Heading”, “Speed” and “Echosounder”:

Control Panel Windows

The Control panel consists of windows. Each window serves for the display
of some operational information, or contains the most frequently used task
controls.

Graphically, windows are divided with special lines. The sample below
shows some Control panel windows of the main tasks.
ECDIS Control panel has the “Multipanel” window, which allows setting
different displays serving for accomplishment of operational tasks. Displays
are selected from the pull-down list opened by pressing the button with the
name of the currently set panel.

Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface 19

User Interface Components

List Box Menu

The list box menus serve for selecting the necessary name or value from
the list. The list box menus have a form with a button with an arrow. A
press on the button opens up a menu which the selection is made from.
The selected name or value is shown on the button after the menu is
closed:

Text Boxes

Text boxes are used for entering values or names:

Input of names is made from ES6/ES4/ES3 keyboard. Values can be

entered from the keyboard or by using the trackball. The trackball motion
in the vertical direction produces fast change of a value in the text box,
whereas the horizontal motion results in much slower change. In some text
boxes, all you have to do after

the input of the necessary value is press the left trackball button for the program

to accept the entered value. In other text boxes, to exit from the input mode it

will be necessary to press the right trackball button and confirm the entered value:
Buttons

Buttons are designed for activating some functions. If a button is greyed, the
operation of the corresponding function is not available in the mode in
question. Buttons may be of the following types:

Button pressed Button released Button greyed

Push-to-lock buttons

Buttons without

locking

If to be turned on, certain functionality needs input of a parameter value,

which will be monitored, the button will be greyed until this parameter is
value is entered.

Parameter value is not entered Parameter value is entered, the Function is switched on
function is not switched on

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

User Interface Components

Radio Buttons

These buttons serve for selecting one function only from the offered set:

Indicators

Indicators show a level for the value set by using the buttons placed next to them:

Progress Bars

The progress bars show the degree to which the program has completed
the operation run by the user:
Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface 21
ECDIS Task Control Panel

ECDIS TASK CONTROL PANEL

The ECDIS task Control panel consists of a number of windows.

Windows are displayed in the right-hand part of the ECDIS task screen.
In addition, all the displayed windows can be moved (by dragging them
with the cursor or by double clicking the left trackball/mouse button in the
window area) onto the Chart panel. To return the window to its place,
press button. If the Control panel does not contain any windows, the
area is filled with chart information.

Control panel contains the Display Panel window, which is intended for the
display of various data types. The window consists of seventeen displays:

System Information;

Primary Status;

Schedule Information;

Route Data;

Ice charts;

Environment Data;

Radar Settings;

EBL/VRM;

AIS Messages;

AIS VDL Data;

Predictor;

TRIAL/TGT Simulator;

Navigator;

Curved Heading Line;

Docking Mode;

Manually Fix Position;

Special Purpose Objects;

TARGETS;
MOB (Man Over Board).

The displays are selected from the list opened by pressing the button with
the name of one of displays in the top part of the window (except “MOB”
display).

Button to the right of the “Display Panel” window is intended for

displaying additional the “Multipanel” window on the ECDIS task Chart
panel. The system enables simultaneous independent operation with
information displays selected in both windows.

Applications Window

The Applications window is intended for loading/switching NS 4000 ECDIS applications:

ECDIS – to turn on/switch to the ECDIS task;

Radar – to turn on/switch to the RADAR task;

Conning – to turn on/switch to the CONNING task;

AMS – to turn on/switch to the AMS task.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ECDIS Task Control Panel

Sensors and Network Window

The “Sensors and Network” window is intended for the display of

information from different sources. The window contains the following
controls:

TX-1 – to select a scanner which the radar picture is supplied by;

Overlay – to turn on display of radar overlay information on electronic

chart in ECDIS;

ARPA – to turn on display of information on targets processed by the ARPA;

AIS – to turn on display of AIS targets;

MASTER – to display the station status in the network and, in the case
of MASTER status, also the transfer of rights to other stations in the
network.

Alarms Window

The “Alarms” window is intended for displaying the alarms and their status.

The window contains the following units:

SENS – alarm source;

LOG: no input – alarm name.

For more detailed description of the alarms display, see document NAVI-SAILOR
4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 4.

Warnings Window
The “Warnings” window is intended for displaying the warnings and their status.

The window contains the following units:

CHART – warning source;

Look up better chart – warning name.

For more detailed description of the alarms display, see document NAVI-SAILOR
4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 4.

Time Window

The “Time” window is intended for the display of the current time. There
may be two types of time values in the window: UTC and ship’s time. To
switch between them, press the button with a picture of the clock face (ship
time if the button is pressed, UTC if it is released):

Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface 23

ECDIS Task Control Panel

The window contains the following elements:

UTC/Ship’s – information on which time is currently displayed;

00:00 W/E – time zone or the difference between the ship time and
UTC (not displayed if UTC is selected); the format is hh:mm;

01-01-01 – display of the current date according to the selected time

type; the format is dd-mm-yy;

00:00:00 – display of the current time; the format is hh:mm:ss.

Primary Window

The “Primary” window is intended for the display of the primary positioning system and
coordinates obtained from it. For the principles of displaying primary positioning data,
see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors,

paragraph Display of Navigational (Essential) Information.

The position source is specified in the left bottom part of the window.
As a free cursor is positioned on the position source name, the source
alias entered

in the System Configuration utility is displayed on the pop-up prompt window.

In case of GPS work in differential mode, the prefix “D” is added before its name.

If there is an offset to the ship position coordinates, the window displays

corrected coordinates and a special symbol: the red triangle. As a free
cursor is positioned on this triangle, the correction value is displayed on
the pop-up prompt window.

Secondary Window

The “Secondary” window is intended for the display of the secondary positioning system,
and of the bearing and range to the position obtained for the Primary positioning system.
For the principles of displaying secondary positioning system data see document NAVI-
SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Display

of Navigational (Essential) Information.

The position source is specified in the left part of the window. As a free cursor

is positioned on the position source name, the source alias entered in the
System Configuration utility is displayed on the pop-up prompt window.

In case of GPS work in differential mode, the prefix “D” is added before its name.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ECDIS Task Control Panel

If there is an offset to the ship position coordinates, the window displays

corrected coordinates and a special symbol: the red triangle. As a free
cursor is positioned on this triangle, the correction value is displayed on
the pop-up prompt window.

COG\SOG\HDG\STW Window

“COG\SOG\HDG\STW” window is designed for the display of ship

motion parameters. The panel displays the following parameters:

HDG – course from gyrocompass;

STW – ship speed through the water.

Note: Only longitudinal part if DLOG selected.

COG – ship course over the ground;

SOG – ship speed over the ground.

Note: Calculated part (longitudinal and transversal) if DLOG selected.

The data source is specified to the right of the own ship motion parameter name:

GYRO1 – gyrocompass with a digital input, its number specified;

GPS1 – GPS (DGPS), its number specified;

ER – echo reference mode;

DR – dead reckoning mode;

MAN – manual input;

LOG1 – log (Speed Through Water) with a digital output, its number specified;

DLOG1 – Doppler log, its number specified;

NONE – no source available.

As a free cursor is positioned on the source name, the source alias
entered in the System Configuration utility is displayed on the pop-up
prompt window.

For the data display principles see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, section
Navigational Sensors, paragraph Display of Navigational (Essential)
Information.

Charts Area Window

The “Charts Area” window is designed for the adjustment of the chart
display on the chart panel:

Chart number – to call a menu with a list of charts under the ship position

(if the ship symbol is displayed on the chart) or the list of all the charts
available in the ship folio; shown on the button is the current chart
number;

1:75,000 – to call a menu listing fixed scale values; the button shows the
current screen scale;

Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface 25

ECDIS Task Control Panel

Autoload – to turn on the function for the automatic loading of

charts, there is an indicator to the right of the button:

– ON – the function is turned on (Autoload button is greyed);

– OFF – the function is turned off;

– FIX – to fix the current chart.

Man. Corr. – to turn on the display of the updating layer; the display is
“ON” if the button is pressed, “OFF” if released; if the button is
greyed, there are no updating objects on the chart.

Stand DISP – to turn on the display of objects included in the standard display.

Note: Which button, Man.Corr. or Stand DISP will be displayed,

depends on the configuring during the installation.

Display Panel Window

The “Display Panel” window is intended for the display of various data types.
In the maximum configuration, the window consists of eighteen displays
which are selected from the list opened by pressing the button with the
name of one of the displays in the top part of the window.

Button to the right of the “Display Panel” window is intended for

displaying additional the “Multipanel” window on the ECDIS task chart
panel. The system enables simultaneous independent operation with
information displays selected in both windows.

Operational Panel Window

The window contains the following functional buttons:

Tasks List – to display a list of functional panels; functional panels are

displayed when the appropriate menu lines are selected;

Event – to make a manual entry of data in the electronic ship logbook for the
current moment, and to place a special mark on the ownship track;

Vectors – to call a menu for setting the lengths of the own ship and target motion vectors;
Fixed option allows a constant vector length to be set (in proportion
to the screen size), the rest – by the set time value (in minutes, 1–24 min).

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Abbreviations Used in the User Interface

Lower Data Group

This window includes:

Depth in meters – information on the depth measurement units used in the ECDIS task;

WGS-84 – to warn that the ECDIS uses charts based on WGS-84 datum;

Show – to turn on/off the constant display of the Control panel.

ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE USER INTERFACE

ECDIS task use the following abbreviations:

Abbreviation Full Name Abbreviation Full Name

AIS Automatic Identification System HDG Heading

ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid LOG (DLOG) Log (Doppler Log)

BRG Bearing LOP Line Of Position

BTW Bearing to Way Point N Up North Up

BWW Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint POSN Position

C Up Course Up PS Positioning System

COG Course Over Ground PTA Planning Time of Arrival

CPA Closest Point of Approach RAD Radius

DIST Distance R Range LOP’s

DR Dead Reckoning RM Relative Motion

DTW Distance to Way Point RNG Range

DTWOL Distance to Wheel over Line ROT Rate Of Turn

ENC Electronic Navigational Chart SOG Speed Over Ground

ETA Estimated Time of Arrival Stand Standard

EBL Electronic Bearing Line STG Speed To Go

EP Estimated Position STW Speed Through the Water

ER Echo Reference TCPA Time to Closest Point of

Approach

ECHO Echosounder TM True Motion

GLO (DGLO) Global Orbiting Navigation TTG Time To Go

Satellite System (Differential

Global Orbiting Navigation

Satellite System)

GLONASS Global Orbiting Navigation V Visual Bearing LOP’s

(DGLONASS) Satellite System (Differential

Global Orbiting Navigation

Satellite System)

GPS (DGPS) Global Positioning System VR Visual/Range LOP’s

(Differential Global Positioning

System)

GYRO Gyrocompass VRM Variable Range Marker

GZ Guard Zone WPT Way Point

H Up Head Up XTD Cross Track Distance

Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface 27

Use of Uniform Measurement Units

USE OF UNIFORM MEASUREMENT UNITS

In the ECDIS task, measurement units are set by default and can be
changed by the operator on “Multiunits” page in theSystem
Configuration utility

(see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION

GUIDE, Chapter 2, section NS 4000 Configuration, paragraph

Workstation Settings). The following units and their shortened names
are used:

Physical Value Measurement Units Abbreviation

Distances Nautical miles NM

Kilometres km

Statute miles stm

Direction Degrees 

Ship and target speed Knots kn

Kilometres per hour km/h

Depth/Height Meters m

Feets ft

Fathoms fms

Draught Meters m

Feets ft

Wind speed Meters per second m/s

Knots kn

Kilometres per hour km/h

Temperature Degrees C
Fahrenheit F

Pressure Hectopascals hPa

The ECDIS task uses geographic coordinates calculated on the basis

of WGS 84 datum only.

KEYBOARD

The ECDIS task ES4/ES6 keyboard is intended for the information input
and task control. Optional ES3 keyboard is intended for the information
input and task control and has additional controls for the RADAR task.

The ECDIS task ES6 keyboard is presented below:

Provided below is a table which specifies the ECDIS tasks and

ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard corresponding controls.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Function Keyboard ES6 Keyboard ES4 Keyboard ES3 ECDIS GUI

Overlay
Ownship motion modes

Targets

Zoom In

Zoom Out MOB

Ahead Ownship presentation

modes

Event EBL
N
/
A

N/A

N/A
Function Keyboard ES6 Keyboard ES4 Keyboard ES3 ECDIS GUI

VRM N/A

Gain N/A

Sea N/A

Rain N/A

Standard Display

Show All Layers

Function Keyboard ES6 Keyboard ES4 Keyboard ES3 ECDIS GUI

Tasks

Alarm

Palette
Target Table

N/A N/A
Function Keyboard ES6 Keyboard ES4 Keyboard ES3 ECDIS GUI

Trial Manoeuvre N/A N/A

Opening of Transas
Integrator toolbar
CHAPTER 2

ECDIS Task Turning On/Off

This chapter describes the procedure
used

for starting/exiting from the NS 4000

MFD.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Turning the ECDIS Task On

TURNING THE ECDIS TASK ON

Each WS is started by pressing “On/Off” button on its console.

The Transas Integrator window will be loaded.

Chapter 2. ECDIS Task Turning On/Off 35
Turning the ECDIS Task Off

Tasks can be equally well switched and started from ES6/ES4/ES3

keyboard and “Transas Integrator”:

To turn on the ECDIS task, press <A> key on ES3/ES4 keyboard or

<ECDIS> key on ES6 keyboard.

All the tasks use identical task-switching user interface implemented as

buttons with task names.

ECDIS RADAR

CONNING AMS

To turn on the ECDIS task from the Transas Integrator

utility, press ECDIS button.

The following window will be displayed on WS upon start of ECDIS task loading.
After the program loading, the ECDIS task screen will be displayed.

TURNING THE ECDIS TASK OFF

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “General” page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Turning the ECDIS Task Off

Press Exit button in the right-hand part of the panel: confirmation window will appear.

Press “Yes” button to confirm exit from the program.

The program will be closed.

The Transas Integrator window will open.

Chapter 2. ECDIS Task Turning On/Off 37

CHAPTER 3

ECDIS Task Control

This chapter describes the general procedure
used in the operation of the ECDIS task.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Transfer of Rights

TRANSFER OF RIGHTS

On ECDIS task with MASTER status in the “Sensors and Network” window

of the Control panel, press MASTER button and select Change MASTER station
line from drop-dawn list.

Press the “Yes” button in the window which will appear to confirm the
transfer of rights to another WS.

On ECDIS task with SLAVE status, press Take over control

button in the “Sensors and Network” window of the Control
panel.

As this button is pressed on one of WS’s, all the rights are transferred to this
station. The former station with MASTER status will have SLAVE status. If
Take Over Control button was not pressed on any of the stations during the
transfer of rights, all

the rights remain with the station, which the transfer of rights was initiated
from (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).
FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION).

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 41

Turning On/Off Control Panel Display on the ECDIS Task Screen

TURNING ON/OFF CONTROL PANEL

DISPLAY ON THE ECDIS TASK SCREEN

To turn off the Control panel display on the ECDIS task screen, press the
nameless button in the right bottom corner of the Control panel.

To re-display the Control panel, press the activated Show button in the right
bottom corner of the ECDIS task screen.
SETTING CONTROL PANEL WINDOWS DISPLAY

Set the order of the panel windows display by “dragging” them as

required to the Chart panel.

To return windows to the Control panel, press button in the top right
corner of each window.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ECDIS Task Screen Configuration

ECDIS TASK SCREEN CONFIGURATION

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel:

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “General” page:

Setting of Screen Colour Palette

Palette group is designed for selecting the screen colour palette to suit the
outside illumination:

Daylight;

Dusk – night with moon;

Night – moonless night;

Night inverted – moonless night (Control panel text inverse colour).

For S-57 format charts, three palettes are used: “Daylight” (Daylight button),
“Dusk” (Dusk button) and “Night” (Night and Night inverted buttons).

In Palette group, check the appropriate checkbox to select the ECDIS task
screen colour palette.

There is another way to switch the palettes. Press successively the

<NIGHT/DAY> key on the ES3/ES4 keyboard or <DAY/NT> on ES6
keyboard. Palettes will be switched in the order of their arrangement in the
Palette group of “General” page.

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 43

Chart Panel Settings

Switching the Graphic Cursor Type

The graphics cursor is used during the operation of some of ECDIS task functions

and represents an intersection of lines corresponding to the latitude and longitude

of the given point, but the form of the graphics cursor can be changed as required.

Chart panel cursor group serves for setting the following types of the graphics cursor:

• Short – the cursor is shown in the form of a small cross;

Long – the cursor is shown in the form of an intersection of two

lines across the entire Chart panel.

In Chart panel cursor group, check the appropriate checkbox to select the
graphic cursor type.

Setting of Screen Boundaries Re-Draw as the Ship Symbol

Approaches Them

Display Reset to group is used for setting the calculated screen redraw
boundaries – percentage ratio of the screen length and distance from the
ship symbol to the screen boundary (30–70 per cent).

Use the input window in Display reset to group to set the ratio (in per cent)
between the screen length and distance from the ship symbol to the
screen boundary.
As the ship symbol approaches the screen boundary so that the set ratio is
fulfilled, the screen will be re-drawn.

CHART PANEL SETTINGS

Setting of Main and Dual Panel Displays

To enable the display of electronic charts and associated information,

“Main” and “Dual” panels are used.

You can change vertical dimensions of “Main” and “Dual” chart panel by using

the cursor. As the cursor is positioned on the bottom boundary of the

“Main” panel, it will change its form, then get hold of the boundary and set it
at the desired height. If the two Chart panels are arranged vertically, this
functionality is retained for altering horizontal dimensions (this arrangement
is possible for Chart panels only).

Use the tab in the lower part of ECDIS task screen to switch to “Dual” panel.

This panel is an additional Chart panel where the ship symbol is permanently
displayed. The panel is not displayed if any of functional panels are turned on
(activated), and vice versa: when it is displayed, no functional panels can be seen.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Chart Panel Settings

The Chart Area of “Main” and “Dual” panels is designed for the following purposes:

to display electronic charts showing classes of chart

information (determined on “Charts” Panel);

to display the ownship symbol with motion vectors;

to display the route loaded for proceeding by in the Navigation mode;

to display the targets and AIS objects.

Displayed in the top left corner of the Chart area is the panel
orientation symbol: an arrow showing direction to the north.

By default, “Main” and “Dual” panels are displayed

vertically, that corresponds to pressed button in “Dual”
panel.
To change the order in which the Chart panels are displayed, press
button in the “Dual” panel.

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 45

Chart Panel Settings

The display of panels will change.

Setting of Ship Symbol on the Chart
Panel by the Cursor Position

To set the ship symbol in the relative motion mode in any point of the Chart panel,

press button. Position the graphic cursor, which will appear, in the
place within the Chart panel convenient for the ship symbol display.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Chart Panel Settings

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The Chart panel will be re-drawn
so that the ship symbol is in the place indicated with the cursor.

Setting Chart Panel Orientation

Set the Chart panel orientation by pressing one of the following buttons in
the control button group of the Chart panel:

• for the orientation to the north;

• for the orientation by the compass heading;

for the orientation by the direction of the current leg of the monitored route.

There is another way of setting the Chart panel orientation. Press

successively the <N/H/C UP> key on the ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard. The
Chart panel orientation will be switched in the specified order.

Setting Ship Symbol Motion Modes

To select the ship symbol motion mode, press the appropriate button in
the control button group of the Chart panel:

• to select relative motion mode;

• to select true motion mode.

There is another way to select the ship symbol motion mode. Press
successively the <TM/RM> key on the ES3/ES6 keyboard. The ship
symbol motion mode will be changed to the reverse.

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 47

Chart Panel Settings

Setting Ship Display and Its Motion

Parameters on the ECDIS Task Screen

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Route Monitoring” page.

To turn on/off the display of own ship and its motion parameters, press the
following buttons in the Ship group:
Head line – to display own ship compass course line;

COG vector – to display motion vector (over the ground);

HDG vector – to display vector of motion relative to the water (log

speed and compass course).

Select from the drop-dawn lists the following settings:

Ship by … – to display of the own ship (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section

Own Ship Motion Data, paragraph Ship Symbol on the Electronic

Charts) on the Chart panel as:

– symbol – the ship symbol (regardless of the scale);

– contour – the ship contour (when the current screen scale is

commensurate with the ship dimensions).

Align by … – to switching orientation (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section

Own Ship Motion Data, paragraph Own Ship Motion Vectors) of the
own ship symbol display along:

– HDG – the vector of the ship’s motion as per the course detector (gyro) reading;

– COG – the ship’s true motion (COG) vector.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Time Zone

Wind vector – to select true wind vector display mode (see document NAVI-
SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,
Chapter 2, section Other Sensors, paragraph Wind Interface);

Course/Leg/Spd – to turn on the display of course, range and speed for each
route leg with the monitored route loaded.

Setting of the Lengths of the Own Ship and Targets Vectors

Press vectors button in the Operational Panel window on the

Control panel (the button shows the current vector length).

Select the required vector length (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section Own
Ship Motion Data, paragraph Own Ship Motion Vectors) from the list, which
will open up and press the left trackball/mouse button.

SETTING TIME ZONE

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Time Zone” page.

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 49

Setting Time Zone

Setting Current Time Zone

Current time zone settings group contains the following elements:

UTC time – line for the display of the current UTC time;

Ship’s time – line for the display of the current ship time;

Time zone – line for the display of the time zone (difference between the
current ship and UTC time).

Use Time Zone line to enter the ship’s time zone. Press <Enter> key: the
time zone value will be set, whereas the ship time value in Ship’s time line
will change to suit the entered time zone.

As the ship time is entered in Ship’s time line, the time zone will change in Time zone line.

Setting Time Zone Change

Schedule time zone change group contains the checkbox for enabling (checkbox
checked) the change of time zone function and a line for change settings:

Change at ship’s time – line for the input and display of the ship time when the
time zone is required to be changed (clock put forward/back);

New ship’s time will be – line for the input and display of the new ship time;

New time zone will be – line for the input and display of the new time zone.
Use New time zone will be line of Schedule time zone change group to set the new
time zone value. Press <Enter> key. Use Change at ship time line to set the
ship time value when the time zone is expected to change.

Press <Enter> key. Check the activated Change at ship time checkbox. At
the set time, the time zone will be changed to suit the value entered for
it.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

USE OF ECDIS TASK TOOLS

Return of Own Ship Symbol Display to the ECDIS Task Screen

There are three ways to return the own ship symbol display to the ECDIS task screen:

1. Press “Ahead” button on the Chart panel toolbar.

Press <AHEAD> key on the ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard.

Press the Standard DISP button in the Charts Area window of the Control
panel (if this button is presented in the configuration, see Chapter 1,
section

ECDIS task, paragraph Charts Area Window).

The own ship symbol will appear on the ECDIS task screen: the screen is
re-drawn so that the ship symbol moves in the direction opposite to the
current course.

ATTENTION!

In true motion mode, even if the ship symbol is available on the ECDIS task
screen, the screen is re-drawn relative to the ship symbol.

Viewing Charts

Standard View cursor (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section ECDIS

Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) appears on the Chart
panel by pressing the right trackball/ mouse button.

As the left trackball/mouse button is pressed, Review function is

turned on, whilst the cursor acquires the form of a graphics cursor.

By moving the cursor with the trackball/mouse, view the necessary charts beyond the
ECDIS task screen boundary. At this stage, Autoload function is required

to be ON (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 1, section Chart Control, paragraph

Autoload).

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 51

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

The graphic cursor coordinates are displayed in Review information

window in the bottom part of the Control panel.

ERBL

Standard ERBL cursor (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section ECDIS

Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) appears on the Chart

panel by pressing the right trackball/mouse button.
Coordinates from the ERBL (bearing and range to the selected point) are
displayed in the information window in the bottom part of the panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

EBL/VRM

“EBL/VRM” display is intended for turning on and adjusting two independent

electronic measurement tools. EBL 1/VRM 1 are shown on the Chart panel as

a dashed lines. EBL 2/VRM 2 are shown on the Chart panel as a dashed
lines with another length of the dash:

For the variable range marker (VRM) and electronic bearing line (EBL) to
be displayed on the ECDIS task Chart panel, press the button with
the name of the set display in the “Display Panel” window of the
Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select EBL/VRM line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
To display the first EBL/VRM pair on the ECDIS task Chart
panel, press EBL 1 and VRM 1 buttons respectively.

To display the second EBL/VRM pair on the ECDIS task Chart

panel, press EBL 2 and VRM 2 buttons respectively.

To set the base point offset of the first EBL/VRM pair relative to the ship

position, press OFFSET button. The base point will move relative to the current

ship position in bearing and distance specified in EBL and VRM boxes. By default

(the Fixed button is depressed), the EBL/VRM during offset will be referenced

to the selected point on the ground, i.e., it will be moving relative to the own ship

at a SOG speed in the direction opposite to the COG. If it is necessary that

the EBL/VRM centre move together with the own ship, release the Fixed button.

By turning <EBL> and <VRM> keys on ES3/ES6 keyboard, set the

required values of EBL and VRM. Press on <EBL/VRM> key to
change between EBL/VRM 1 and 2.

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 53

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

Index Lines

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select EBL/VRM line and press the left mouse button.
Press the button with index line number. Position the free cursor in the
Range input field and press the left mouse button.

By rolling the mouse, set the required value of distance from the centre of
the own ship mark, or enter it from the keyboard. Press the left mouse
button. The index line will be set at the specified distance.

Note: Distance to the index line is measured along the perpendicular

dropped from the own ship mark centre to the index line.

Position the free cursor in the T BRG input field and press the left mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

By rolling mouse, set the required value of the index line bearing or enter it
from the keyboard. Press the left mouse button. The index line will be set in
the specified direction.

Note: 0° bearing corresponds to the line direction to the north. The index line bearing
varies from 0° to 360°. On the reciprocal bearings, the line direction is the
same, but it is located on different sides of the own ship mark.

To set the index line bearing value equal to the current ship
course, press the Reset button.

Zoom

Standard Zoom cursor (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section ECDIS

Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) appears on the Chart panel

by pressing the right trackball/mouse button. A press on the left
trackball/mouse button turns on Zoom function, whilst the cursor
assumes the form of graphics cursor.

Position the graphic cursor, which will appear, in the corner of the chart
fragment required to be viewed. Press the left trackball/mouse button.
Select the required chart fragment by moving the cursor with the
trackball/mouse.
Press the left trackball/mouse button. The Chart panel scale will change
so that the selected chart fragment is fully displayed on the Chart panel.

Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control 55

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

Manual Entry in the Ship Log

There are two ways to make a ship log entry on the entire set of
events as of the current moment:

Press Event button in the “Operational Panel” window on the Control panel;

Press <EVENT> key on the ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard.

An entry will be made on the ship log, and a special mark will be made on
the own ship track.
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
CHAPTER 4

Navigation Tasks
This chapter describes the procedure
used

during the operation in the navigation

mode.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Setting Position Sources

SETTING POSITION SOURCES

ATTENTION!

Setting of position sources is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “Navigation” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Navigation” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Ship Position” page.
“Ship Position” page is designed for selection of position source. “Ship
position” page displays all the connected coordinates sensors, as well as
Dead Reckoning (DR) and Echo Reference (ER) modes.

Setting Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS)

The group of each EPFS source contains the following elements:

PRIM – to select the source as primary positioning system; the window is intended for
display of the current coordinates received from the positioning system;

SEC – to select the source as secondary positioning system; the window is intended for
display of the current coordinates received from the positioning system;

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 59

Setting Position Sources

Position window for the coordinates display;

Offset – window for the input and display of the ship position coordinates offset;

Cancel Offset – to cancel the entered corrections;

Set Offset By – to enter the correction by specifying new

coordinates with the ECDIS task graphic cursor.

Press PRIM and SEC buttons to select the primary and secondary positioning systems.

To enter the EPFS offset, use the following procedure:

To manual input. Position the cursor in Offset window on the minute value and
press the left trackball/mouse button to activate the window. Enter the
coordinate offset and press <Enter> key.

The ship symbol will move to the corrected coordinates, the

coordinate offset will be displayed in Offset window, whilst position
window will show corrected coordinates from position source.

Input EPFS offset by the cursor. Press Set Offset By button position source
group and select Cursor.
Move the graphic cursor, which will appear, to the corrected ship position coordinates.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Position Sources

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The ship symbol will move to the
specified coordinates.

The coordinate offset will be shown in Offset window, whilst position

window will display corrected coordinates from position systems.

To monitor parameters of the EPFS used for the primary positioning

system, press the button with the name of the set display in the
Display Panel window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select Primary Status line and
press the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 61

Setting Position Sources

“Primary Status” display is used for presenting the following data from
EPFS, which used as primary positioning system:

Fixed UTC – UTC time which the data is provided for;

Latitude – latitude coordinate;

Longitude – longitude coordinate;

Quality – positioning quality indicator (GPS operating mode);

Satellites – number of satellites used for the positioning;

HDOP – HDOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision) value;

Data age – age of differential corrections;

Station ID – name of the station, which transmits differential corrections for the DGPS
used by the primary positioning system (where the differential mode is used).
In the absence of data from PS positioning systems (or in absence of
valid GGA sentence), there are empty fields on the display.

Setting ER Mode

ER group contains the following elements:

PRIM – to select ER mode as primary positioning system;

SEC – to select ER mode as secondary positioning system;

Position window for the coordinates display;

Offset – window for the input and display of the ship position coordinates offset;

Cancel Offset – to cancel the entered corrections;

Set Offset By – to enter the correction by specifying new

coordinates with the ECDIS task graphic cursor;

Select targets – to select targets as fixed reference points (button is

enabled if at least one steadily tracked target is available);

Reset targets – to cancel reference points.

To set the ER mode, it is first necessary to set the reference points. Press
the ARPA button in the top part of the Control panel to turn on the display of
targets.

Note: If the ARPA tracks some targets, Select targets button will be activated.

Press Select targets button.

Position the free cursor on the tracked target, which will serve as a reference point.

Note: Any ARPA tracked stationary target can serve as a reference point.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Position Sources

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

“R” index will show up next to the reference point. Set the necessary
number of reference points (up to 5).

To use position determined with the aid of reference points in ER group,

press PRIM or SEC button.
To cancel the reference point, press Reset targets button.

Position the free cursor on the reference point, which will cancel.

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

“R” index will stop show up next to the reference point.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 63

Setting Position Sources

The position offset for the ER is entered in much the same way as for
the EFFS (see the previous paragraph).

Setting DR Mode

DR group contains the following elements:

PRIM – to select DR mode as primary positioning system;

SEC – to select DR mode as secondary positioning system;

Position window for the display and input of coordinates;

Set by cursor – to enter the position by specifying new coordinates

with the ECDIS task graphics cursor.

In DR group press PRIM or SEC button. Enter current ship position in the input window.
To input DR by cursor, press Set by cursor button.

Move the graphic cursor, which will appear, to the corrected ship position coordinates.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The ship symbol will move to the
specified coordinates.

Position window will display new coordinates from DR.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Position Sources

Use of Manually Fix Position for Determining Ship Position

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select Manually Fix Position line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
“Manually Fix Position” display is intended for constructing the ship line of position (LOP)
by measuring bearing and/or range to one or more visible objects whose coordinates are
known in advance (or the object can be uniquely identified on the chart).

The display contains the following items:

Accept position – to record the calculated ship position on the chart and in the
Ship Logbook (when the DR positioning system is used, to enter
calculated coordinates for further computation);

Cancel all – to cancel all the measurements which have been made;

1…6 – to switch bearing and/or range measurements. That number of

buttons is active which is equal to the number of measurements which
have been made, the rest are disabled. Depending on the
measurement status, the buttons have the following colours:

– black – bearing/range determined and referenced to the chart conspicuous point;

– red – measurement taken and referenced, but the system considers it

incorrect on the basis of LOP being at a distance of more than one
mile from the reckoned position (with LOP advice function ON only);

– blue – free cell for setting the measurement;

– white – the data is entered, but the position line is not referenced by the user.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 65

Setting Position Sources

Bearing – to enter bearing;

Distance – to enter range;

Brg/Dist – to enter simultaneously the bearing and distance to one object;

Automatic jump to new LOP – to turn on automatic transfer to the next measurement
after the input of LOP data without referencing to an object;
LOP advise – to turn on the function providing a warning that the position line
is more than 1 mile away from the reckoned position. In this case, the
button with the measurement number turns red;

Snap to objects – LOP automatic referencing to objects.

Press Bearing button. After the selection of the measurement type, “Manually
Fix Position” display looks like shown in the drawing below:

In this case, depending on the measurement type, the display contains the
following items:

Time – time of the current measurement data input;

D – difference between the input of the first and current measurement data in
minutes and seconds;

Brg – to enter bearing to the object;

Name – name or type of the object which is referenced to with the Snap to
Object function turned on (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100
ECDIS
(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section Manually
Fix Position, paragraph Line of Position Referencing);

Apply – to confirm the entered current measurement data. With Automatic

jump to new LOP function ON, there is an automatic transfer to the input
of the next measurement;

Cancel – to cancel the entered current measurement data.

Enter the bearing to the object in Brg input box by using the
trackball/mouse or keyboard. Press the left trackball/mouse button.

Note: Measurement time in Time box is set at the current time minus 5 seconds.

Press the activated Apply button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Position Sources

A red coloured line will be drawn on the chart panel, with the
measurement time specified.

Use the button in the top part of “Manually Fix Position” display to switch
to the next measurement (if Automatic jump to new LOP function is ON, the
switching is made automatically).
Press Distance button.

Enter the distance to the object in Dist input box by using the
trackball/mouse or keyboard. Press the left trackball/mouse button.

Press the activated Apply button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 67

Setting Position Sources

A red coloured position line will appear on the chart panel.

To reference the position lines, press the button with the first measurement
number in “Manually Fix Position” display. After the confirmation of the
entered current measurement data, “Manually Fix Position” display looks
like shown below:
In this case, the display contains the following items:

Move and reference – to reference the position line to a chart object;

Delete – to cancel the entered current measurement data.

Press Move and reference button.

On the chart panel, bring the beginning of the position line in coincidence
with the object which the bearing was measured to (if the Snap to object
checkbox is checked, the LOP will be referenced to the object automatically
if it is not farther than 0.5 mile from its beginning). Press the left
trackball/mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Position Sources

To bind the next position line, press the button with the next measurement
number in “Manually Fix Position” display.
Press Move and reference button.

On the chart panel, bring the centre of the position line circle into coincidence

with the object which the distance was measured to (if the Snap to object
checkbox is checked, the LOP will be referenced to the object automatically
if it is not farther than 0.5 mile from its centre). Press the left
trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 69

Setting Heading Source

The position line will be bound to the object and will be displayed in the orange

colour. After the binding of two position lines, the orange coloured
symbol will appear on the chart panel in the point with coordinates of the
calculated ship position. Specified next to the symbol are the letters “EP”
and the most recent calculation time.

Construct the necessary number of position lines.

If it is necessary to accept the results of manually fix position, use Accept

position button (see also document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V.
2.00.009).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section Manually Fix Position).

SETTING HEADING SOURCE

ATTENTION!

Setting of heading sources is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “Navigation” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the top part of “Navigation” panel to switch to “Heading” page.

“Heading” page is designed for selection of heading source. “Heading”

page shows all the connected heading sensors.

The group of each heading source contains the following elements:

GYRO 1 – to select this sensor as heading source; the window is

intended for display heading value from the sensor;

Gyro error – for the manual input of the gyro error (for gyro compass);

Magnetic variation – for the input of the magnetic variation from the database (Auto
button), or manually in the input window (for magnetic compass).

Press the button with the source name to select the main source of
heading whose data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations
in the system.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Speed Sources

If necessary, enter errors (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, section Navigational

Sensors, paragraph Compensations for Navigational Data) for gyro and
variation for magnetic compass.

SETTING SPEED SOURCES

ATTENTION!

Setting of speed sources is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “Navigation” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Navigation” panel to switch to “Speed” page.
“Speed” page is designed for selection of speed source.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 71

Setting Speed Sources

Setting Speed Source Through the Water

STW sources group is designed for selection a source of speed through the water.

The group shows all the connected speed through the water sensors.

The group of each speed through the water source can contain the following elements:

DLOG – to select DLOG as a source of STW; the windows are intended

for display longitudinal and transverse component of the speed-

through-water vector, the arrows showing the direction of components;

LOG – to select LOG as a source of speed through the water; the

window is intended for display STW value from log;

MANUAL – to select the use of manual STW input; the window is

intended for speed input.

Press the button with the source name to select the source of speed through the water,
whose data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the system.

Setting Speed Source Over the Ground

SOG sources group is designed for selection a source of speed over ground.
The group shows all the connected speed over ground sensors.

The group of each speed over ground source can contain the following elements:

Prim PS: GPS 1 – to select EPFS as a source of SOG; the window is

intended for display SOG value from EPFS;

DLOG – to select DLOG as a source of SOG; the windows are intended for
display longitudinal and transverse component of the SOG vector, the
arrows showing the direction of components;

ER – to select ER mode as a source of SOG; the window is intended for

display SOG value; the buttons is intended for:

– Select targets – to select targets as fixed reference points (button is

enabled if at least one steadily tracked target is available);

– Reset targets – to cancel reference points.

STW + Drift – to select STW as SOG, manual drift input taken into
account. The window is intended for display SOG value. The
input windows are intended for:

– Set – to display and manually enter the set;

– Drift – to display and manually enter the drift.

Press the button with the source name to select the source of speed over ground
whose data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations in the system.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Setting Depth Source

SETTING DEPTH SOURCE

ATTENTION!

Setting of depth sources is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “Navigation” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Navigation” panel to switch to “Echosounder” page.
“Echosounder” page is designed for selection of depth source.
“Echosounder” page shows all the connected depth sensors.

The group of each depth source can contain the following elements:

ECHOSOUNDER 1 – to select this sensor as depth source; the window is

intended for display depth value from the sensor;

Ship’s draft – to enter ship’s draft in the place of echosounder transducer location;

Chart calculated depth – depth from electronic chart(s);

Tide – expected tidal height value calculated for the current time at the
reference point closest to the ship position, and the name of this
reference point.

Press the button with the source name to select the main source of
depth whose data will henceforth be used for making all the calculations
in the system. Enter ship’s draft for each echosounder.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 73

Obtaining Current Information about Navigational Data

OBTAINING CURRENT INFORMATION

ABOUT NAVIGATIONAL DATA

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select Navigator line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
“Navigator” display is intended for enlarged presentation of the following selectable data:

HDG (Heading);

STW;

COG;

SOG;

ROT;

XTD;

BTW (Bearing to Waypoint);

BWW (Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint);

DTW (distance to waypoint);

ETA;

TTG (time to go);

Radius (turn radius at the next waypoint);

Turn Radius.

Only six values could be displayed simultaneously at the display.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Current Information about Navigational Data

Press the button in the left-hand part of the display and from the pull-
down list, select navigational data which is required to be shown on the
display.

Make up the “Navigator” display configuration which suits you best.

To display depth from the echosounder on the ECDIS task screen, press
the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel” window of
the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select System Information line and
press the left trackball/mouse button.

In DPTH row it is displayed value of water depth under the keel (from the sounder data).

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 75

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

LOADING OF ROUTE AND SCHEDULE

IN THE NAVIGATION MODE

ATTENTION!

Loading of route and schedule in the navigation mode is available only at

station with the status MASTER.

Loading Route

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Route Monitoring” page.
Route group enables loading and unloading of monitored routes and a
schedule by using the following buttons:

Load route – to select and load a route from the offered list;

Set schedule – to select and load a schedule for the loaded route
from the offered list;

Unload – to unload the previously loaded route and/or schedule.

Press Load route button in Route row of buttons.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

Select the required route and press the left trackball/mouse button. The
selected route will be loaded for sailing in the Chart panel, and its name
will be displayed on the button. The route loaded for sailing will be shown
in red colour.

Waypoints group contains buttons and windows for the input

values used for calculating mutual positions of the route
elements and the ship:
Next Waypoint – to select the mode of setting the next WPT for
calculating parameters of motion along the route:

– Auto selection – to switch WPT’s successively in the automatic mode; the

WPT closest to the ship position is selected automatically;

– Manual selection – to set the next WPT number manually; input of the
next WPT number is made in the appropriate window.

Arrival Circle – to set the radius of the WPT change circle for the
generation of an alert about the arrival in the WPT and switching to
the next one:
– Same for All WPT’s – to set manually for all the route points in the
window to the right;

– From Route Table – to set automatically form the data entered in the route.

Radius – to set parameters of the turn radius arc for the display of an
approximate track on the turn on another route leg:

– Same for All WPT's – to set manually for all the route points in the
window to the right;

– From Route Table – to set automatically form the data entered in the route.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 77

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

For the manual setting of the next WPT, press Next Waypoint button.

In the list, which will open up, select Manual selection and press the left
trackball/mouse button. Use the activated input line to enter the next WPT
number.

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

ATTENTION!
In the automatic mode, it is the next WPT of the route leg which the ship is proceeding
by which is set. If some other WPT is selected manually for the next one, all the
calculations are made relative to the route leg adjacent to the selected WPT.

For the manual setting of the WPT change circle radius, press Arrival circle button.

In the list, which will open up, select Same for all WPT’s and press the left
trackball/mouse button. Use the activated input line to enter the WPT
change circle radius. Press the left trackball/mouse button.

The set radius will be set for all the point of the monitored route.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

For the manual setting of the turn arc parameters, press Radius button.

In the list, which will open up, select Same for all WPT’s and press the left trackball/mouse
button. Use the activated left-hand input line to enter a new turn arc radius.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The set parameters will be

fixed for all the points of the monitored route.

To turn on the display on the ECDIS task screen monitoring rout

elements, press following:

XTD – to display deviation from the route line (set during the route
generation see chapter Handling of Routes, section Creating a
Route);

Arrival circle – to display set WPT change circle;

Radius – to display set turn radius arc on the turn to another route leg;

WPT names – to display the names of waypoints set in the route plan.

Loading Schedule
Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Route Monitoring” page.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 79

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

Route group enables loading and unloading of monitored routes and a

schedule by using the following buttons:

Load Route – to select and load a route from the offered list;

Set schedule – to select and load a schedule for the loaded route from the offered list;

Unload – to unload the previously loaded route and/or schedule.

Press Load route button in Route row of buttons.

Select the required route and press the left trackball/mouse button. The
selected route will be loaded for sailing on the Chart panel, and its name
will be shown on the button.

Press Set schedule button in Route row of buttons.

The list of schedules created for this route will open up. Select the necessary schedule.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The selected schedule will be loaded.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

Obtaining Current Information about Monitoring Route

and Schedule

Route Data

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select Route data line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
“Route Data” display is intended for the display of data as the ship is proceeding
along the route to the next waypoint (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 5, section

Route Monitoring, paragraph Sailing Along the Route). The display contains

the following data:

Route – name of the monitored route; as Last WPT passed alarm is

generated, the word “Route” is shown in the red colour;

To WPT – number and name of the current WPT which the ship is
proceeding to; the WPT name is shown in black colour if the WPT is
selected automatically, and in the blue colour if selected manually;

BWW – direction of the monitored route leg which the ship is proceeding
by if the leg is of RL type; or the current course in case of the GC leg;
as Course difference alarm is generated, the letters “BWW” is shown in
the red colour;

XTD – actual distance from the current route leg; as Out of XTD alarm is
generated, the letters “XTD” are shown in red colour;

BTW – bearing to the current WPT;

DTW – distance to the current WPT;

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 81

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

ETA – the estimated time (UTC/Ship depending on the setting made in

the Control panel) of arrival in the current WPT, the remaining

distance and current speed (SOG) taken into account;

TTG – time to go to the current waypoint calculated with regard to the

actual speed (SOG);

Next WPT – number of the next WPT;

BWW – direction of the next route leg.

Schedule Information

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select Schedule Information line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
“Schedule Information” display serves for presenting information connected with sailing
according to the selected schedule (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS
(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 5, section Route Monitoring,
paragraph Sailing Along the Route). For the display of data, it is necessary to load a
route on “Route Monitoring” page of “Monitoring” panel (see above Loading Route item).
The schedule elements whose values differ from those set on “Route Monitoring” page of
“Monitoring” (Out of Schedule) panel are shown in red colour.

The display contains the following data:

To WPT – to select a WPT number for the display of associated schedule elements; the
line to the right shows the name of the WPT if any was given by the operator;
Schedule – to turn on the display of ETA and TTG calculated with
regard to the prepared schedule;

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode

Current SOG – to turn on the display of ETA and TTG calculated with
regard to the current speed (SOG);

ETA (UTC) – estimated time of arrival in the selected WPT calculated from

the remaining distance and set speed (UTC/Ship depending on the

setting made in the Control panel);

TTG – time to go to the specified WPT calculated with regard to the actual ETA;

DTW – distance to the specified waypoint;

PTA – planned time of arrival in the specified WPT taken from the schedule.

In the bottom part of the display there is a calculator for calculating speed to go (STG)

to the specified waypoint or planned time of arrival (PTA) in the specified waypoint:

STG – operator-entered planned speed of proceeding to the specified

point for the PTA calculations in the window on the right;

Planned time of arrival – operator-entered planned time of arrival (PTA) to the

specified point for the STG calculations in the window on the left.

Unloading Route and Schedule

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Route Monitoring” page.

In Route group press Unload button. The route and/or schedule loaded for
sailing will be unloaded.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 83

Handling Charts and Chart Information

HANDLING CHARTS AND CHART INFORMATION

Prompt Search and Load Charts

Open “Charts” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the left part of “Charts” panel, which will open up, to switch

to “Complete list” or “By position” page depending on which chart is

required to be found. All the functions of these pages are identical,
the only difference between them being in the set of charts available
for work.
The aforementioned pages contain the following:

Chart number input window and Find button activate the chart search
function by the number entered in the window.

If the chart with the required number has not been found, the
prompt bar in the bottom part of the area displays the following
message:

– No charts found – no charts with this number have been found;

– Partial match found – a group of charts has been found, whose numbers
start with the entered characters.

Manual chart selection window. Charts in the list can be sorted by the
following parameters:

– Chart Number – chart number;

– Scale – chart scale;

– Issue date – chart issue date;

– Last Correction – latest correction date;

– Format – chart format.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Charts and Chart Information

Type the number or the first characters of a chart from the ship folio in the
input field, and press Find button.

The necessary chart will be highlighted in the table. Press Load Chart
button, the selected chart will be loaded in the Chart panel.

Loading and Scaling Charts under Own Ship Position

Open “Charts” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the right-hand part of “Charts” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “General” page.

This page is intended for the control of chart automatic loading and
scaling which are determined by the following parameters:

Chart Autoload – chart loading modes switching buttons:

– ON – to turn on the chart autoload mode whereby the largest scale

chart will be automatically loaded;

– OFF – to turn off the autoload mode; as this is done, the current chart
under the ship position or the chart loaded manually is fixed until the
loading mode switch;

– FIX – to turn on the chart fixing mode; as the ship symbol crosses the
boundary of such chart, the chart loading mode is automatically
switched to ON position.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 85

Handling Charts and Chart Information

Chart Autoscale – chart scaling modes switching buttons:

– ON – to load the chart on its original scale;

– OFF – to load the chart on the screen current scale.

Scale Ratio – to set the loaded chart scale differing from its original
scale by the number of fixed scale values (5);

Show only libraries for DNC charts – to enable displaying of DNC library
name instead of DNC tiles names (if DNC charts used);

Chart priority – to set the chart loading priority under the ship position:

– None – to load charts most suitable to the set scale. In this case, if
there are several charts on the same scale, priority is given to the
TX-97 (TRX) format charts;

– ENC – to load ENC format vector charts;

– DNC – to load DNC vector charts;

– HCRF – to load ARCS and Seafarer format raster charts;

– Chart Assistant – to open the Chart Assistant window;

– HCRF Review – to open the window for viewing ARCS and Seafarer format charts.

Chart Loading

To turn on chart autoloading:

Press ON button in Charts Autoload row of buttons (if not depressed).

Press Autoload button in the Charts Area window of the Control panel.

This window is designed for the adjustment of the chart display on the Chart panel:
– Chart number – to call a menu with a list of charts under the ship
position (if the ship symbol is displayed on the chart) or the list of
all the charts available in the ship folio. The button shows the
current chart number;

– Autoload – to turn on the function for the automatic loading of

charts. There is an indicator to the right of the button:

ON – the function is turned on (Autoload button is greyed);

OFF – the function is turned off;

FIX – to fix the current chart.

The chart autoloading mode is set.

To manual loading of the required chart, press OFF button in Charts Autoload
row of buttons (if not depressed).

The chart autoloading mode is OFF, and the screen displays the current chart only.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Charts and Chart Information

In the Charts Area window of the Control panel, press button with the
current chart number.

Select the necessary chart from the list. The ECDIS task screen will
display the required chart.
Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 87
Handling Charts and Chart Information

Selecting Loading Priority of Various Format Charts

Where ARCS and Seafarer format charts are available in the ship folio,
you can set their loading priority. In Chart priority group check HCRF
checkbox to set the loading priority for charts of ARCS and Seafarer
formats.

To view ARCS and Seafarer format charts, press HCRF Review button or button.

The chart is displayed in the window, which opens up.

To display the updating which may have been done, check Mark Updates checkbox.

If necessary to set loading priority of ENC format charts, check ENC checkbox.

If necessary to set loading priority of DNC format charts, check DNC checkbox.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Charts and Chart Information

Chart Scaling

To automatic scaling press ON button in Chart autoload row of

buttons (if not depressed).

Press ON button in Chart autoscale row of buttons (if not depressed).

If it is necessary to turn on manual change of scale in the transfer to the next

chart, use Scale ratio window to set the number of fixed values (from 1 to 5),
which the scale should be increased/decreased by.

To manual scaling press OFF button in Chart autoscale row of buttons.

Press scale button in “Chart Area” window on the Control panel (the
button shows the current screen scale).
Select the required scale from the list, which will open up, and press the
left trackball/mouse button. The ECDIS task graphic screen will display
all the charts on the set scale.

There are two ways to decrease the chart display scale by the fixed scale value:

• Press button on the Chart panel toolbar;

Press <ZOOM OUT> key on the ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 89

Handling Charts and Chart Information

There are two ways to increase the chart display scale by the fixed scale value:

• Press button on the Chart panel toolbar;

Press <ZOOM IN> key on the ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard.

To display the chart on the original scale, press button on the

Chart panel toolbar.

Switching Chart Information Layers

Open “Charts” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of “Charts” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Layers” page.
This page is intended for controlling the display of individual chart
information classes by using the following controls:

Display category – to switch presentations of different display types:

– Base – to turn on presentation of objects included in the Base Display;

– Standard – to turn on presentation of objects included in the Standard Display;

– Custom – to turn on presentation of objects included in the

Additional Information Display at the user discretion;

– All – to turn on presentation of all the objects included in the

Additional Information Display.

Spot soundings to – to turn on the display of depth values smaller than the setting made
in the relevant window (if the setting is “0”, all the soundings are displayed);
Isolated dangers – to turn on the display of isolated dangers with depths
over them larger than the safety depth;

Cables, pipelines – to turn on the display of submerged cables and pipeline;

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Charts and Chart Information

Names – to turn on the display of names;

Other information – to turn on the display of other information;

All depth contours – to turn on the display of all the depth contours;

Seabed – to turn on the display of ground characteristics;

Buoys names – to turn on the display of buoys names;

Show All – to turn on the display of the aforementioned chart layers;

Hide All – to turn off the display of the aforementioned chart layers;

Scale bar – to turn on the display of chart scale graphic

presentation (in the left-hand part of the screen);

Grid lines – to turn on the display of the coordinate grid;

Chart boundaries – to turn on the display of ship folio chart boundaries;

Navtex – to turn on the display of NAVTEX message symbols.

To set the necessary layer, press Display Category button and select
it from the drop-dawn list.

Select Custom function from the list.

All the checkboxes for turning on the display of necessary additional information classes
will be checked by default. Uncheck the appropriate checkboxes to turn off the display of
unnecessary information classes. There is another way to set the necessary layer.

Press the <Standard DISPLAY> key on ES3/ES4/ES6

keyboard to set the Standard Display.

Press <ALL LAYERS> key on ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard to turn on

presentation of all the objects included in the Additional Information
Display.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 91

Handling Charts and Chart Information

Handling ENC Format Charts

Open “Charts” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of “Charts” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “ENC” page.

This page is intended for the adjustment of ENC format chart display and handling.
From Areas drop-dawn list, select the style of area type object boundary
display (Plain and Symbolised).

From Points drop-dawn list, select the style of the point type object
display (Paper chart and Simplified).

Check the following checkboxes for turning on the display of necessary

additional information classes:

Four shades – to turn on the colour highlighting of the set depth areas;

Shallow pattern – to turn on the display of hatching in the presentation of

areas with depths smaller than the safety contour on ENC format
charts;

Use SCAMIN – to turn on the display of an object on inadmissible

scales to it (generalisation method selection);

Full light lines – to switch the lengths of lines delimiting the light visibility sectors;

Highlight info – to turn on the display of highlighting for objects with “Inform” attribute;

Show correction – to turn on colour highlighting for the objects which have undergone
some modification in the process of the latest accepted correction;

M-quality objects – to turn on the display of accuracy symbols for the ship
positioning and sounding during seabed contour survey on ENC format
charts;

National names – to turn on the display of national names;

Show outdates – to turn on the display of temporary objects regardless

of their effective time.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Trial Manoeuvre

If it is necessary, press Show All button to turn on the display of all the
parameters or Hide All button to turn off them.

In Shallow contour input window, enter the value of the deep water
contour delineating the colour highlighting of the shallow area for
ENC format charts.

In Deep contour input window, enter the value of the shallow water contour
delimiting the colour highlighting of the deep water area for ENC format
charts.

The following windows used for information only:

Safety contour – to display the safety contour value for vector format chart;

Safety depth – to display the safety depth value for vector format chart.

TRIAL MANOEUVRE

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select TRIAlL/TGT Simulator line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Use the tab in the top part of the “TRIAL/TGT Simulator” panel which will
open up, to switch to the “Trial Manoeuvre” page.

Press Loaded or In Ballast button depending on the ships loading.

Position the free cursor on Trial line input field and press the left
trackball/mouse button. Set the required length of the expected ship
motion line (EML) by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard.
Press the left trackball button.

Use a similar procedure to enter the required turn radius in the Radius input field.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 93

Trial Manoeuvre

For trial manoeuvre taking speed alteration into account, press Set SPD button.

Use buttons to set the engine telegraph position after the

manoeuvre start in the Set SPD input box.

ATTENTION!

During trial manoeuvring with speed alteration, the calculation error may run up to 15%.

A trial manoeuvre can be performed in two ways:

By entering values via the keyboard.

Press Show button. The ECDIS task screen displays the own ship
motion line with parameters of the intended manoeuvre and the
targets’ motion lines changed to assume the value set in Trial line box.

Position the free cursor on Set CTW input field and press the left
trackball/mouse button.
Set the required next course by rolling the trackball/mouse, or enter
it from the keyboard. Press the left trackball/mouse button.

You can also use buttons.

The start of the manoeuvre is determined by the Delay parameter which can be
entered in both minutes and miles. Re-calculations use the current ship speed.
Press the min or NM button to select the manoeuvre start setting. Position

the free cursor on Delay input field and press the left trackball/mouse
button. Set the required delay time (distance) before the start of the
manoeuvre by rolling the trackball/mouse, or enter it from the keyboard.

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Trial Manoeuvre

If the data set by the operator does not allow the turn with the set radius

and delay time to be inscribed in the set EML length, the program will
produce an appropriate warning, and the EML is not displayed on the
PPI any more.

The settings you are making are displayed automatically on the ECDIS task screen.

To accept the manoeuvre press Drop button. The selected optimum

manoeuvre parameters will be record. In this case, the count off of the
selected time before the manoeuvre start will begin exactly at the
moment when this button is pressed. A second press on Drop button
cancels the recording of parameters.

The ECDIS task has an alternative mode for entering the intended
manoeuvre parameters by using the trackball.

Press Play button. As this is done, Show button will be pressed

automatically and values of the own ship new course and time to the
manoeuvre start can be edited with the trackball straight on the ECDIS
task screen.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 95

Trial Manoeuvre

By rolling the trackball horizontally, set the next course. Roll the trackball
vertically to set the delay time before the start of the turn. The expected ship
motion time is shown dynamically on the ECDIS task screen. The Chart panel
displays the own ship motion line with parameters of the intended manoeuvre
and the targets’ motion lines changed to assume the value set in Trial line box.
To accept the manoeuvre, press the left trackball button. The
expected ship motion line will be attached to the PPI, and Drop
button will be automatically pressed on “Trial Manoeuvre” page.

To exit from the trial manoeuvre mode, release Show button or switch to another panel.

If in the course of a trial manoeuvre, in approaching a certain target

CPA value assume value smaller than those set in “Targets” panel, the
corresponding segments of the own ship and target motion line will turn
red.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Simulator ARPA Targets

SIMULATOR ARPA TARGETS

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select TRIAlL/TGT Simulator line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Use the tab in the top part of the “TRIAL/TGT Simulator” display which will
open up, to switch to the “TGT Simulator” page.
Setting Training Targets

Press the Add Target button on the “TGT Simulator” page. An acquisition
marker will appear on the PPI. Move the acquisition marker to the simulator
target position.

Press the left trackball button. By rolling/moving the trackball, set the target motion vector.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 97

Simulator ARPA Targets

Parameters of the target which is being set, are displayed

dynamically on the “TGT Simulator” page.

Press the left trackball button.

The PPI will display an ARPA tracked simulator target in the form of a
circle with a pre-calculated motion vector.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the simulator target setting mode.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Simulator ARPA Targets

Editing Simulator Target Motion Vectors

To edit simulator target motion vectors, press the Edit Target

button on the “TGT Simulator” page.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear on the PPI, on the
simulator target whose motion vector should be edited.
Press the left trackball button. By rolling/moving the trackball, set a
new target motion vector.

Press the left trackball button.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 99

Simulator ARPA Targets

Deleting Simulator Targets

To delete a simulator target, press the Cancel Target button on the “TGT Simulator” page.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear on the PPI, on the
simulator target, which should be deleted.

Press the left trackball button.

The simulator target will be deleted.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the simulator target deleting mode.

To delete all the simulator targets, press the Cancel All button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using the Predictor

USING THE PREDICTOR

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select Predictor line and press the left mouse button.
Use Prediction time input window to specify the time (from 1 to 6 min, step 30 s)

necessary for calculating the estimated ship position.

Press the Show prediction button. The Chart panel wtill display the estimated
position where the ship is expected to be after the set time interval. In this
case, the current SOG, ROT and HDG are used for calculations.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 101

Using the Curved Heading Line

USING THE CURVED HEADING LINE

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select Cuved Heading Line line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
The “Curved Heading Line” display is intended for planning the ship’s
turning in to another course or a route.

The display contains the following parameters:

New CTW – ship course after the turn;

Radius – ship turn radius;

Length – length of the expected ship motion line (EML);

Delay – distance from the own ship position to the manoeuvre (wheel-over)
point (WOP);

F dist – distance from the WOP to the beginning of the turn;

Play – trial manoeuvre (the Carry mode);

Drop – to accept the manoeuvre (the Drop mode);

AP Off – to turn on control of the Curved Heading Line functionality

from the autopilot (not used in the current version);

Link – to connect the Curved Heading Line to the monitored route;

Edit – to edit the F distance input field protected with the password;

Show Curved Heading Line – to turn on the display of the Curved Heading
Line on the ECDIS task screen.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using the Curved Heading Line

The Curved Heading Line functionality includes two modes: Carry and
Drop. The Carry mode corresponds to the trial manoeuvre, whereas the
Drop mode corresponds to its accepting (for more details see the NAVI-
SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, in the Curved

Heading Line section).

Planning Turn with the Aid of Curved Heading Line

Position the free cursor on Lenth input field and press the left trackball/mouse
button. Set the required length of the expected ship motion line (EML) by
rolling the trackball (from 0 to 10 NM), or enter it from the keyboard.

Press the left trackball button.

Use a similar procedure to enter the required turn radius in the Radius input field.

The F dist parameter is set by default, if it is required to be changed, press the Edit button.
Enter the password and press the “OK” button. After this, the F dist input
field will be available for editing.

The trial manoeuvre for making a turn (the Carry mode ) can be performed in two ways:

By entering values via the keyboard.

Press Show Curved Heading Line button. Position the free cursor on New CTW
input field and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 103

Using the Curved Heading Line

Set the required next course by rolling the trackball/mouse, or enter

it from the keyboard. Press the left trackball/mouse button.

You can also use buttons.

The start of the manoeuvre is determined by the Delay parameter.

Position the free cursor on Delay input field and press the left
trackball/mouse button. Set the required delay distance before the
start of the manoeuvre by rolling the trackball/mouse, or enter it from
the keyboard.

If the data set by the operator does not fulfil certain conditions, the
program will produce an appropriate warning, and the EML is not
displayed on the ECDIS task screen any more.

The settings you are making are displayed automatically on the

ECDIS task screen. The EML is shown in blue on the ECDIS task
screen.
To accept the manoeuvre, press Drop button. The EML is shown in
pink on the ECDIS task screen.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using the Curved Heading Line

The selected optimum manoeuvre parameters will be record. In this case,

the count off of the selected time before the manoeuvre start will begin exactly at
the moment when this button is pressed (see also document NAVI-SAILOR

4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3,

in the Curved Heading Line section).

Where an alternative manoeuvre should be planned, change some parameter.

On the ECDIS task screen the blue coloured EML will re-appear in the Carry mode.

A second press on Drop button accept new manoeuvre.

The ECDIS task has an alternative mode for entering the Curved Heading
Line parameters by using the trackball/mouse.

Press Play button. As this is done, Show Curved Heading Line button will be pressed
automatically, and values of the own ship new course and time to the manoeuvre
start can be edited with the trackball straight on the ECDIS task screen.
By rolling the trackball horizontally, set the next course. Roll the
trackball vertically to set the delay time before the start of the turn.
The expected ship motion time is shown dynamically on the ECDIS
task screen.

To accept the manoeuvre, press the left trackball button. The

expected ship motion line will be attached to the PPI, and Drop
button will be automatically pressed on “Curved Heading Line”
display.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 105

Using the Curved Heading Line

Use of Curved Heading Line for Turning in to a Route

Load the route which you should turn in to, in the monitoring mode. For the
current waypoint select the end WPT on the leg of the route which should
be turned in to (see above section Loading of Route and Schedule in the
Navigation Mode, paragraph Loading Route).

The “Curved Heading Line” display will show the name of the route and
waypoints (WPT) of the current route leg.

Set the EML parameters so that the curve is directed to the current route
leg and the ship motion direction after the turn is coincident with the
route direction.

The current route leg direction should not be more than 145 degrees
different from the current course.
Press Drop button. After that press Link button.

The EML will attach to the current route leg.

If the manoeuvre is impossible with the selected parameters, the

“Requested CEBL is impossible” message is displayed.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Docking Mode

USING DOCKING MODE

This mode is intended for mooring operations, sailing in the restricted waters
at low speeds. For the Docking Mode to function, the DLOG should be
available, which sends to the ECDIS valid VBW messages along with the
valid own ship heading and position.

ATTENTION!

The use of the Docking Mode (DM) is possible on scales of 1:7500 and larger.

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “General” page.
In DM Settings group from the drop-dawn list select the scale, which will
be set on the “Dual” panel as the Docking Mode is turned on.

In Ship history group set the following parameters of History functionality in DM:

Steps – setting of the number of displayed symbols;

Interval – setting of the time plots between displayed symbols.

There is a capability to adjust the number of displayed symbols and

time plots between them: from 1 to 15 symbols and from 1 to 30
seconds respectively.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 107

Using Docking Mode

Use the tab in the lower part of ECDIS task screen to switch to
“Dual” panel and press button on its toolbar.

At the same time, the “Docking Mode” display opens up in the Control
panel; it serves for the Docking Mode control.
Press the Source button and select the speed source.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Docking Mode

When DLOG is selected, the display will show the speed vector
components taken from the VBW sentence.

To display components of vectors of the speed through the water and

speed over the ground on the “Dual” panel, press the Water or Bottom radio
button respectively.

If there is no stern speed sensor on the ship, press the Calc button to
calculate the relevant (water or ground) stern transverse speed.

If the SOG sensor is selected for the speed source, the bow and stern
component values which are displayed in the “Dual” panel, are
automatically calculated in the NS 4000 MFD (see also NAVI-SAILOR
4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, in the Docking Mode section under

Calculation).

Press button to turn on History functionality.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 109
Using Docking Mode

Symbols of the previous ship contour positions will be shown on the “Dual” panel.

Switch to “Reference Points” page.

Reference points enables displaying the length to relevant points on

screen from 8 positions of ship.

Check Show signatures checkbox to display point numbers.

Press the Set button next to the necessary reference point. In the “Dual”
panel, use the ERBL to set the fastening point for a reference point. Set the
necessary number of reference points.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Docking Mode
To change positions of fastening points for reference points, use the Edit
buttons. To cancel the fastening for all the reference points, press the Clear
all references button.

You can shift reference point positions on the ship contour by using the cursor.

To do this, use the radio button to select the necessary reference point (this
point is shown in green on the ship contour). Position the free cursor on the
ship contour; as this is done, the cursor changes its form. Press the left
trackball button: the reference point will be set in the new position.

For the default setting of reference points, press the Set default location button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 111

Using Auto Zoom Function

USING AUTO ZOOM FUNCTION

Auto Zoom mode enables the automatic increase of scale as the next waypoint

is approached (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 3, section Split Screen). This mode

is available on “Dual” panel only.

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “General” page.
In AutoZoom Settings group from the drop-dawn list, select the maximum
scale as the ship is passing the current WPT on “Dual” panel. In Time of
update input window set the DTW analysis interval.

To turn on Auto Zoom mode, press button on “Dual” Chart panel toolbar.

Note: The ship should be proceeding in the route monitoring mode.

In this case, as DTW is decreasing, the ECDIS task increases the scale by
one fixed scale value so that the ship position remains within “Dual” panel.
With the ship approaching the boundary of “Dual” panel in the process of
manoeuvres, the scale may be reduced by one fixed scale value. With a
change of the WPT, the scale is set so that “Dual” panel displays the ship
symbol, current leg of the monitored route and the current WPT.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Search and Rescue Operations

SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATIONS

Using Man Overboard (MOB) Mode

MOB mode enables the display of information on a geographic

point saved at a certain time. There are three ways to turn on MOB
mode:

1. Press button on the Chart panel toolbar.

Press <MOB> key on the ES3/ES6 keyboard.

Press external MOB button (see document NAVI-SAILOR

4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE,
Annex B, section

Adjustment of NS 4000 MFD Operation with WAGO Modules ,

paragraph Connection of External MOB Button).

As this is done, the system makes an logbook entry which contains the name

of the event: “MOB ENABLED” and a full set of recorded parameters.

Control panel displays a panel shown below:
The following parameters can be displayed:

coordinates of MOB mode activation;

time elapsed since MOB mode was activated;

bearing from the ship current position to the activation point;

distance from the ship current position to the activation point. If yow

know the MOB event time, press on Set time… button.

In the input window enter the MOB event time, MOB point is set in the
own ship track point closest to the entered time.

If yow know the MOB event coordinates, press Set pos… button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 113

Search and Rescue Operations

In the input window enter the MOB coordinates, MOB display is re-
drawn to suit the entered data (e.g. upon receipt of coordinates from
another ship).

To turn the MOB mode off second, press button on the Chart panel
toolbar or <MOB> key on the ES3 or ES6 keyboard.

Press “Yes” button. Electronic log entry containing “MOB DISABLED”

event name, is made.

For the operation of MOB over the AIS, see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS document, Chapter 1, MOB mode

with use of RDF Rhothetta RT-202 section.

Creating SAR Routes

Open “Tasks” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the top part of “Tasks” panel to switch to “SAR” page.

There are two ways to set the SAR route start point coordinates in the
Commence search point group:

Enter the SAR route start point coordinates in the input window.

Press By Cursor button. Move the graphic cursor, which will

appear, to the SAR route start point coordinates.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Search and Rescue Operations

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

In Drift and Set input windows, set the expected drift and set at the SAR operation site.

In Own Ship Coordinates group, set the coordinates of the point of turn to the
SAR route start point. If the current ship coordinates are obtained from the
positioning system and are then updating until the route save moment
check Current checkbox.

In Speed set the expected speed of proceeding along the SAR route.

Expending Square Route

Press the button Search pattern type in SAR route generation group. In the list, which will open
up, select Expending square line and press the left trackball button (see document NAVI-
SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,

Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

Search pattern heading – search direction;

Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;

Number of legs – number of successive route legs;

Starting leg length – start leg length.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button
to save the route.

To quick load this SAR route to monitoring mode, press Monitor button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 115

Search and Rescue Operations

Parallel Tracks Route

Press the button Search pattern type in SAR route generation group. In the list,
which will open up, select Parallel tracks line and press the left trackball button
(see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,

Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

Search pattern heading – search direction;

Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;

Number of legs – number of successive route legs;

Leg length – length of each leg;

Track spacing – width of zone between the parallel tracks.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press Save button
to save the route.

To quick load this SAR route to monitoring mode, press Monitor button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Search and Rescue Operations

Sector Search Route

Press the button Search pattern type in SAR route generation group. In the list,
which will open up, select Sector search line and press the left trackball button
(see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,

Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

Search pattern heading – search direction;

Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;

Number of sectors – number of sectors;

Search radius – search area radius (sectors);

Turn angle – sector turn angle.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press Save button
to save the route.

To quick load this SAR route to monitoring mode, press Monitor button.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 117

Search and Rescue Operations

Track Line Search Route

Press the button Search pattern type in SAR route generation group. In the list, which will open
up, select Track line search line and press the left trackball button (see document NAVI-
SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,

Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

Search pattern heading – search direction;

Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;

Leg length – length of each leg;

Track Spacing – width of zone between the parallel tracks;

Return to initial position – to plot the SAR route with a return to the initial position.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press Save button
to save the route.

To quick load this SAR route to monitoring mode, press Monitor button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Search and Rescue Operations

Creeping Line Search Route

Press the button Search pattern type in SAR route generation group. In the list,
which will open up, select Creeping line search line and press the left trackball
button

(see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

Search pattern heading – search direction;

Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;

Leg length – length of each leg;

Track spacing – width of zone between the parallel tracks.

Select a rescue facility whose speed is known and enter it in the input box to the right:

If the Aircraft speed is selected, the recommended ship speed, calculated

from a certain formula, will be displayed automatically in the Ship speed
box:

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press Save button
to save the route.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 119

Search and Rescue Operations

For quick loading of this SAR route to the monitoring mode, press the
Monitor button. In this case, the recommended route for a ship
engaged in search will look like follows:

If the Ship speed is selected, the recommended aircraft speed, calculated from a
certain formula, will be displayed automatically in the Aircraft speed box:
Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save
button to save the route.

For quick loading of this SAR route to the monitoring mode, press the
Monitor button. In this case, the recommended route for the aircraft
engaged in search will look like follows:

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Special Purpose Objects

USING SPECIAL PURPOSE OBJECTS

ATTENTION!

Work with Special Purpose Objects is only available at a station with the
MASTER status.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select Special Purpose Objects line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
This NS 4000 MFD functionality enables special purpose objects (SPO),
mobile and fixed, with certain features to be created and referenced to an
electronic chart with the purpose of their further monitoring and obtaining of
auxiliary information.

SPO Creating

Select the type of SPO to be created. Press the button Object type and
select the appropriate item from the drop-down list:

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 121

Using Special Purpose Objects

The following types of SPO are available for selection:

Static – the fixed surface object: Target with constant coordinates;

Seek circle – the search circle: Target with constant coordinates around
which a circle is formed at the specified moment of time, increasing in
accordance with settings made by the user;

Relative – the “satellite”: Target with motion parameters identical to the

own ship’s course and speed;

Moveable – the mobile object: Target with arbitrary motion parameters;

UW Static – the fixed submerged object: Target with constant

coordinates and depth;

UPS – the UPS: Target with constant coordinates, reference point.

Press Add Item button. Position the acquisition marker (graphics cursor) on
the point where the SPO is required to be plotted.

Press the left trackball/mouse button: SPO will be set in the specified coordinates.
Repeat the procedure until you set the required number of SPO. After the input of

the last SPO, press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the SPO setting mode.

SPO Deleting

Press Delete button. Position the marker on the SPO is required to be deleted.

Press the left trackball button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Special Purpose Objects

If it is necessary to delete all the previously plotted objects simultaneously,

including when the SPO is not displayed on the screen, use Delete all button.

Other Functions

To plot the line connecting the own ship symbol and selected
SPO, press Set line button. Position the marker on the required
SPO.

Press the left trackball button.

To hide all the SPO, press Hide All Objects button. Repeated pressing this
button results in re-appearing of all the hidden SPO.

Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks 123

CHAPTER 5
Setting of Safety

Parameters
This chapter describes the procedure used in the
setting of safety parameters.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the Schedule

MONITORING OF SAILING ALONG THE

ROUTE AND BY THE SCHEDULE

ATTENTION!

Setting of safety parameters in the sailing along the route and by the
schedule is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Route Monitoring” page.
Alarms group is intended for turning on/off and setting of safety parameters for

the alarm generation during the sailing along the route and according to the schedule:

End of route – to enable alarm generation as the last WPT of the monitored
route is passed;

Out of XTD – to enable alarm generation when the ship deviation from the
route line is larger than the value set during the route planning;

Out of schedule – to enable and set of alarms generated when the ship is
behind or ahead of the schedule;

Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters 127

Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the Schedule

WPT approach – to enable alarm generation as a set period of time

before the approach to the WPT;

Off leg course – to enable and set parameters of the alarm generated if

the deviation between the current course (HDG) and the route leg line
direction exceeds the set value.

Check End of route checkbox in Alarms group to turn on the alarm

generation as the last point of the route is passed.

The parameter of tracking the ship position relative to the current route leg
is set by default. XTD value is set at the time when the route is created in
“Route Editor” panel. The alarm is generated when the ship sails beyond
the XTD limits.

Use WPT approach to line to enter the alarm generation time value as the
next WPT is approached. Check the activated WPT Approach checkbox to
turn on the alarm generated if the value of time of approach to the next
WPT is less than the set one.

Use Off leg course line to enter the value of difference between the ship
course and route leg direction. Check the activated Off leg course checkbox
to turn on the alarm generation as the difference between the courses
exceeds the set value.

Use Out of schedule line to enter the behind-the-schedule or ahead-of-the-

schedule time relative to the loaded schedule. The alarm is generated
when the set value is exceeded. Check the activated Out of schedule
checkbox.
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
Monitoring of Safety Alarms

MONITORING OF SAFETY ALARMS

ATTENTION!

Setting of safety parameters for the detection objects representing danger to

navigation is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Safety Alarms” page.
Setting of Safety Parameters for the Detection
of Dangerous Objects

The Safety frame group is intended for setting the size of the frame, which will
be used for the chart data analysis and for the generation of the
Antigrounding alarms, Area alerts and Navigational alarms.

Ahead – window for the input of advance time for alarm/warning generation.

The time value determines the length equal to the distance covered by
the ship proceeding at the current SOG. If the zero value is set,
warnings are generated when the ship symbol crosses the area limits;

Port – to set the width of the corridor to the left of the ship;

Starboard – to set the width of the corridor to the right of the ship;

Show safety frame – to turn on the display of a safety frame on the ECDIS task screen.

Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters 129

Monitoring of Safety Alarms

In the Ahead, Port and Starboard input boxes set the necessary values
which will determined the shape of the safety frame.

Check the Show safety frame checkbox to show the safety frame. The safety
frame is displayed with a red outlined rectangle:

Safety parameters group is intended for the setting and viewing of safety
parameters in the Navigation Mode:
Check on scale larger than – to take into account all the charts with a scale larger
than the set one for a check for the availability of dangers to navigation;

Safety contour – window for the input of the safety contour parameter value;

Safety depth – window for the input of the safety depth parameter value;

Shallow contour – window for displaying value of the deep water contour delineating
the colour highlighting of the shallow area for ENC format charts;
Deep contour – window for displaying the parameter value of the shallow water contour
delimiting the colour highlighting of the deep water area for ENC format charts.

Press Check on scale large than button and select the minimum scale value.

The selected value will be shown on the button. All the charts on the
scales larger than the set one, will be taken into account. By default,
1:300,000 is set.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Monitoring of Safety Alarms

Use Safety contour line to enter the safety contour value.

Use Safety depth line to enter the safety depth value.

Setting of Safety Parameters in the Sailing in the Vicinity

of Dangerous Objects

Antigrounding alarms group contains checkboxes for enabling/disabling the

following safety parameters:

Nav. danger – to enable the alarm generated upon the approach to the isolated danger;

Land danger – to enable the alarm generation upon the approach to the
objects with “Land” attribute;

AIDS to navigation – to enable the alarm generation upon the approach

to the fixed point objects (buoys etc.);

Safety contour – to line enable the alarm generated upon the approach to the
less than the depth Safety contour value.

Check the activated Nav. danger checkbox to enable the alarm generation when

an isolated danger to navigation, updating objects with “danger”/“depth”

attributes or a danger NAVTEX object turns up within the safety frame.

Check the Land danger checkbox to enable the alarm generation

triggered off by the detection of land objects in the safety frame.
Check the AIDS to navigation checkbox to enable the alarm generation
triggered off by the detection of fixed point objects in the safety frame.

Check the Safety contour checkbox to turn on the alarm generation as the
safety contour is crossed by the safety frame.

Monitoring of Crossing of Area Limits in Basic

and Additional Groups

“Basic Areas” tab containing checkboxes for the selection (assigning

danger-to-navigation status) from the main group of those areas which
will be tracked by the ECDIS task.

Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters 131

Monitoring of Navigational Alarms

“Additional Areas” tab containing checkboxes for the selection (assigning

danger-to-navigation status) from the additional group of those areas, which
will be tracked by the ECDIS task.

Select the required areas by checking the appropriate checkboxes in “Basic Areas” tab.

Switch to “Additional Areas” tab. Select the required areas by

checking the appropriate checkboxes in “Additional Areas” tab.

MONITORING OF NAVIGATIONAL ALARMS

ATTENTION!

Setting parameters for navigational alarms is available only at station with

the status MASTER.

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Navigational Alarms” page.

Primary/Secondary difference group is used for entering the maximum difference

between the readings of positioning systems, and for turning on their monitoring.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Monitoring of Navigational Alarms

In Prim/Sec diverged line, enter the divergence distance between the

coordinates from the primary and secondary positioning methods. Check
the activated Prim/Sec diverged checkbox for the alarm to be generated when
the set value is exceeded.

The Chart group is used for turning on the monitoring of electronic

charts under the own ship.

Check the Off chart alarm checkbox to enable the alarm generation if the
ship sails beyond the chart boundary with the Chart Autoload mode off.

Anchor watch setting group is used for setting the maximum distance
(radius) from the anchoring point to the bow and/or stern. As the ship
moves beyond any of the formed circles, an alarm is generated.

In Bow ring line enter the maximum distance (radius) from the anchoring point to the
bow. Check the Bow alarm checkbox to turn on the warning generation as the ship sails
beyond the set distance. In Stern ring line enter the maximum distance (radius) from the
anchoring point to the stern. Check the Stern alarm checkbox to turn

on the warning generation as the ship sails beyond the set distance.

Check the activated Show anchor watch ring checkbox to show anchor watch
ring around the ship position at the time when the Bow alarm or the Stern
alarm was set.
Sounder group is used for turning on monitoring of the echo sounder
readings and contains the following checkboxes:

Sounder depth – to enable and enter the minimum depth value for an
alarm generated upon the reception of data from the echo
sounder;

Sounder alarm – to enable/disable Sounder: no input alarm.

Use Sounder depth line to enter the safety depth value from the echo sounder.
Check the activated Sounder depth checkbox for turning on the alarm
generation as a depth smaller than the set one is detected.

Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters 133

Monitoring of Time

MONITORING OF TIME

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “General” page.

Setting of End-of-Watch Alerts

End of Watch Alarm group is intended for setting the period of time before the end of
the current watch when an alert will be generated. The order of watches is set in the
System Configuration utility (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE, Chapter 2, NS 4000

Configuration section, NS 4000/4100 Settings paragraph).

Use End of Watch Alarm input line to enter the time before the end of the
current watch when the warning should be generated.

Setting of the Timer

Timer Warning group is designed for the control of the timer functions:

Every – setting of the alarm to be generated over the time specified in the
line to the right;

At – setting of the alarm to be generated at the time specified in the line to the right;

Off – to turn off timer functions.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Monitoring of Time

To set the alarm generation over equal time intervals, check Every
checkbox and enter value of the alert generation time interval in the input
line.

To set the alert generation at the certain time, check At checkbox and enter
the alert generation time (ship time) to the right.
Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters 135
CHAPTER 6

Using Logging Functions

This chapter describes the procedure used for
handling information archived in the course of the
NS 4000 MFD operation.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Using Ship Logbook

USING SHIP LOGBOOK

Open “Logbook” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Logbook” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Ship LogBook” page.
“Ship LogBook” page is designed for recording events which occurred
during the ECDIS task operation. The table is a set of rows (events) and of
columns (event parameters). For the set of events which are automatically
shown in the Ship Logbook, see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V.
2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, section Ship Logbook, paragraph Ship Logbook

Fomation Principes). Besides, the operator can enter events manually, edit
events and enter comments on the events. The events editing and input of
comments is password protected.

Press the Jump to date button and select the date which the Ship Logbook
entries will be shown for.

Note: The “Ship LogBook” page stores date-by-date events for the last 90 days.

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 139

Using Ship Logbook

To manually enter an event in the Ship Logbook, press the Create Event button.
Select the necessary event from the list box.

The event is shown in the Ship Logbook. The data available in the table
columns as of the event occurrence time are shown in the Ship Logbook
automatically.

To enter comments on the event, select it in the Ship Logbook with the
cursor and press the Edit button on the “Comment” tab.

In the “Logon” window which will appear, enter the password (user and password
settings are made in the System Configuration utility, see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE, Chapter 2, section NS4000

Configuration, paragraph Security Settings).

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Ship Logbook

Press the “OK” button. In the “Comment” tab, enter the necessary
comments on the event.

Press the Apply button. Comments will be entered in the Ship Logbook.

To view comments entered for the event in question, switch to the “History list” tab.
For rules for the input and display of comments in the Ship Logbook,

see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,

Chapter 6, section Ship Logbook, paragraph Making Corrections and Safety.

The Ship Logbook enables editing of the event parameters from “Chart
Track” to “RPM” columns only. Use the trackball to position the cursor on
the cell which should be edited and make a double left click.

In the “Logon” window which will appear, select the user and enter the
password (the users and passwords are set in the System Configuration
utility,

see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE,

Chapter 2, section NS4000 Configuration, paragraph Security Settings).

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 141

Using Ship Logbook

Press the “OK” button.

Roll the trackball or use the keyboard to enter the necessary value and
press the left trackball button or the <Enter> key. To cancel input of the
correction, press the right mouse button. To view the corrections entered for
the given event, switch to the “History list” tab.
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
Work with Archive

WORK WITH ARCHIVE

Open “Logbook” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Logbook” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Archive” page.
The “Archive” page is designed for displaying archived Ship Logbooks.

For the archiving rules see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, section Ship Logbook, paragraph

Archiving Ship Logbook.

Press the Ship LogBook button and select the necessary archive from the list box.

Note: Each archive stores 90 day records. Archives are named after the
months whose entries are included in them.

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 143

Ship Logbook Printout

The page will display records contained in the archive. Press the Jump to date
button and select the date which the Ship Logbook records will be
displayed for.

The table will display Ship Logbook events starting from the first event of

the selected date. It should be noted that on the “Archive” page you can
only view the Ship Logbook.

SHIP LOGBOOK PRINTOUT

Open “Logbook” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the top part of “Logbook” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Print Settings” page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Ship Logbook Printout

Enter the following information in the input lines:

Master – captain’s name;

Voyage No;

From – port of departure;

To – port of destination.

In the Orientation group select the text orientation on the page during the printout:

Portrait or Landscape.

Select the printout range: Whole logbook, Today or Dates. In the case of Dates,
use From and To input boxes to set the time interval for the printout of the
Ship Logbook.

Note: By using the Data filter you can also print out an archive Ship Logbook.

For the Ship Logbook print preview, press the Print preview button.
Close the “Print Preview” window and press the Print button.

To convert the Ship Logbook to the *.pdf file, press the Export to PDF button.

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 145

Using Electronic System Logbook

USING ELECTRONIC SYSTEM LOGBOOK

ATTENTION!

The Electronic System log is not synchronised in the net among WS’s.

Open “Logbook” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Logbook” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “System Log” page.
“System Log” page is designed for the recording of events, which occurred during the
ECDIS task operation. The table is a set of columns (events) and of rows (event
parameters). By default, the table reflects the following event parameters:

Date – date of the event;

Time – time of the event (UTC);

Event – name of the event;

Primary Sensor – primary positioning system;

Secondary Sensor – secondary positioning system;

L/L – event latitude/longitude coordinate;

Offset L/L – event latitude/longitude offset;

Prim/Sec Diverge – distance and direction to the secondary positioning

system (large – distance exceeding the limit set in the safety
parameters);

COG - SOG – course and speed values received from the positioning system;

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Using Electronic System Logbook

HDG - LOG – course and speed values received from the compass and log;

Average speed – average speed in the last 10 minutes;

WatchDist-Log – distance covered during the watch (by chart – by log);

DAY DIST-LOG – distance covered in 24 hours (by chart – by log);

VOY DIST-LOG – summary distance passed (by chart – by log);

Echo Sounder – depth from the sounder or entered manually if the sounder is
not connected in the System Configuration utility;

Charts displayed – charts loaded for proceeding in Navigation Mode, the

source specified (ARCS, BSB – BSB/NDI, ENC, TRS – TX-97, SRF –
Seafarer);

Wind direction – true wind direction;

Wind speed – true wind speed;

Water temperature – water temperature.

The following system log fields are filled in by the operator manually:

Remarks – operator notes;

Wave direction – wave direction value entered by the operator;

Wave Height – wave height value entered by the operator;

Air temperature – air temperature value entered by the operator;

Pressure – atmospheric pressure value entered by the operator;

Visibility – visibility range value entered by the operator;

Engine RPM – main engine rpm value entered by the operator.

To do this, position the free cursor on the necessary cell and press the left
trackball button. Type the necessary message and press the left trackball
button or the <Enter> key:
To change contents of the electronic system logbook (delete
unnecessary event parameters), press Fields button in Settings group:

Uncheck checkboxes of the unnecessary event parameters.

By default, it is only “Main” group of events which is displayed in the

system log (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V.
2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, section Electronic System Logbook, paragraph

Electronic System Logbook Formations Principles ). To display other
groups of events in the system log, press Filter button in Settings group.

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 147

Using Electronic System Logbook

Check checkboxes of the necessary parameter groups.

By default, the rate of recording the TIME event (see document NAVI-SAILOR

4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6,

section Electronic System Logbook, paragraph Electronic System Logbook
Formations Principles) is set at 1 hour. To change it, press Entry button

in Settings group.

Check the checkbox next to the necessary TIME event recording rate.

To set the value of the total covered distance to zero, press Reset Dist.
button in Settings group.
To print out the electronic system logbook, press Print button in Settings group.

Note: The printer is required to be connected to the LTP of one of WS’s.

Use From and To input boxes to set the time interval for the printout of the
electronic system logbook events, and press Print button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Watch Schedule Editing

WATCH SCHEDULE EDITING

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Watch Editor” page.

The page displays the watch schedule which was set in the System Configuration utility
during the installation (see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).

INSTALLATION GUIDE, Chapter 2, section NS4000 Configuration,

paragraph System Settings).
Press the Edit button. In the “Logon” window which will appear, select the
user and enter the password (users passwords are set in the System
Configuration utility, see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V.
2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE,

Chapter 2, section NS4000 Configuration, paragraph Security Settings).

Press the “OK” button. Use cells of the Rank column to enter the watch
officer’s rank, in the cell of the Family name column enter his/her family name.

Fill in the rest of table cells. Press the Apply button. The watch officer’s
position and name will be shown in the Ship Logbook in the “End of watch”.

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 149

Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task

OWN SHIP TRACK IN THE ECDIS TASK

Setting Track Display Elements

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Route Monitoring” page.
In Past track settings group of “Route Monitoring” page, which will open
up, set the colour of the track segment, which is being formed, by
selecting it from the offered Track сolour palette.

Press Plot interval button.

In the list, which will open up, select the track plot interval and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Use Own ship track input line to enter the time value which the length of the
displayed own ship track will correspond to.

If it is necessary to turn on the display of a track from the secondary

positioning system, check the Show secondary track checkbox.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task

Open “Logbook” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Logbook” panel, which will open up, to switch

to “System Log” page. In the left-hand part of “System Log” page, press Filter button.
Check the checkboxes of the event groups, which are required to be
displayed on the track.

These events will be shown in the form of time tags on the set own ship track.

Viewing Archive Tracks

Open “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions 151

Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Route Monitoring” page.

In Past track settings group of “Route Monitoring” page, which will

open up, press Plot interval button:

In the list, which will open up, select the track plot interval and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Press Track history button:

In the list, which will open up, select the date of the track required to be
displayed, and press the left trackball/mouse button. The selected date
track is displayed on the Chart panel.

To display the entire own ship track for the selected date on the Chart
panel, press Focus on Track button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

CHAPTER 7

Manual Updating
This chapter describes the procedure used in the
handling of updating objects.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Turning On/Off the Display of Updating Objects and Their Attributes

TURNING ON/OFF THE DISPLAY OF UPDATING

OBJECTS AND THEIR ATTRIBUTES

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

There are two ways to turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task
screen:

Press Man. Corr. button in the Charts Area window of the Control panel.

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.

Press ON button.
To turn on/off the display of updating objects attributes on the ECDIS task
screen, press the following buttons:

Attachments – to turn on highlighting of objects with attached files;

Deleted – to turn on highlighting of deleted objects;

Colour – to turn on orange coloured highlighting of updating objects;

Show temporary timed objects – to turn on the display of temporary

updating objects until the time when they become effective.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 155

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

CREATING AND PLOTTING UPDATING OBJECTS

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.
The updating object creating and plotting procedure consists of four stages:

selection of the object category and type;

assigning of attributes to the object (except attached files);

plotting of an object;

assigning of “attached file” attribute.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Selection of the Object Category and Type

Use the tab in the updating object selection area, to select the updating object category:

Symbols category:

To select the object type in “Symbols” tab, which will open up, press
the button with its picture.

Lines category:

To select the object type in “Lines” tab, which will open up, press the
button with its picture.

Text category:
Use the input line of “Text” tab, which will open up, to enter the required text.

Depth category:

Use the input line of “Depth” tab, which will open up, to enter the
required distinctive depth value.

Circles category:

To select the necessary object in “Circles” tab, press the button with its picture.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 157

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Assigning Attributes to the Selected Object

For Line, Text or Depth category objects, select the colour (“Object colour”
attribute) in the palette under the category selection group. For Symbol
category, the selection of colour is not available, as the objects already
have a special colouring.

Open attribute group (if not yet displayed on the panel) by pressing Attributes
button to the right of the palette.

Set the updating display time (“Temporary updating” attribute). To do this, check

Start checkbox and set the start date and time of the updating object display.

Check End checkbox and set the updating object display end date and time.

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in Text input line (information
will be displayed on the chart).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in

Info field (information will not be displayed unless Info function is
used).
Check Danger checkbox (“Danger to navigation” attribute) as required.

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in Depth line.

Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the updating object.

Plotting of the Selected Object

To plot the selected object on the chart, press New Object button.

Position the cursor, which will appear on the graphic screen, in the required coordinates.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the point type object will be set in the
specified coordinates.

To set lines and areas, after the plotting of the initial point, move the
cursor to the next point and press the left button again. Repeat the
procedure until you set the required number of point.

After the input of the last point of the line or area, press the right trackball/mouse button:

the cursor will change its form, and the object will be set in the specified coordinates:

line by the specified points;

area by the points, the first and the last of them connected.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 159

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Assigning “Attached File” Attribute

To assign “Attached file” attribute, the selected object should be plotted on the chart.

To attach files (*.txt, *.rtf, *.bmp, *.doc, *gif, *.jpg,

*.tif, *.pdf), press Attachments button in the left bottom part of the
panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object and
press the left trackball/mouse button.

The screen will display a window with lists of all the files available for attaching

(to view the contents of the selected file, press View button on the appropriate panel).

The list of files available for attaching is formed in the Data Tool utility.
To attach a file (group of files) to the updating object, select it in Available
files group and press Attach >> button.

The file (group of files) will move to Attached files group. Press Apply button to
confirm the changes you have made.

To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in Attached files
group and press << Detach button. The file (group of files) will move to Available
files group. Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.

Press Save button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing Updating Objects

EDITING UPDATING OBJECTS

Editing Point Type Objects

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.
Press Edit Object button in the top left corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object (in case of text objects,
the acquisition point is the first character) and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The bottom part of the screen will display a panel for editing updating objects.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 161

Editing Updating Objects

Change the object type as required; to do this, use the tab in the
updating object selection area to select the updating object category:

Symbols category:

In “Symbols” tab, which will open, select the new object type by
pressing the button with its picture.

Depth category:
Use the input line of “Depth” tab, which will open up, enter the
required distinctive depth value.

Text category.

Use the input line of “Text” tab, which will open up, to enter the required text:

For Depth and Text category objects, select the colour (“Object colour” attribute)
from the palette under the object category selection area. For Symbol category,

the selection of colour is not available, as the object already have a special colouring.

Open the attribute area (if not yet displayed on the panel) by pressing
Attributes button to the right of the palette.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing Updating Objects

Edit the necessary attributes of the updating object.

Set the updating display time (“Temporary updating” attribute). To do this, check

Start checkbox and set the start date and time of the updating object display.

Check End checkbox and set the updating object display end date and time.

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in Text input line (information will be
displayed on the chart).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in Info field

(information will not be displayed unless Info function is used).

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in Depth line.

Check Danger checkbox (“Danger to navigation” attribute).

Files are attached/detached (“Attached file” attribute) in a separate step.

Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have made: “Manual
Correction” panel will open up.

To attach files to the updating object (“Attached file” attribute) press

Attachments button in the left bottom corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the edited object
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 163

Editing Updating Objects

The screen will display a window with a list of files available for
attaching/detaching (to view the contents of the selected file, press View
button on the pertinent panel). The list of files available for attaching is
formed in the Data Tool utility.

To attach a file (group of files) to the updating object, select it in Available

files group and press Attach >> button.
The file (group of files) will move to Attached files group. Press Apply button to
confirm the changes you have made.

To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in Attached files
group and press << Detach button. The file (group of files) will move to Available
files group. Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.

Press Save button.

The procedure of a editing a point type object is completed.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing Updating Objects

Editing Line, Area and Circle Type Objects

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.

Press Edit Object button in the top left corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the line (object boundary)

and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The acquisition marker will “acquire” the object and change own form.

If the object configuration is required to be changed, move the cursor to the

required coordinates. Press the left trackball/mouse button and repeat this
operation until the necessary configuration is set.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 165

Editing Updating Objects

Press the right trackball/mouse button. The bottom part of the screen will display a
panel for the editing of updating objects. Edit the object type and its attributes.

Change the object type as required in “Lines” tab; to do this, press the
button with its picture in the updating object selection area.
In the palette under the object category selection area, select the colour of
the line or area type object (“Object colour” attribute).

Open the attribute area (if not yet displayed on the panel) by pressing
Attributes button to the right of the palette.

Edit the necessary attributes of the updating object.

Set the updating display time (“Temporary updating” attribute). To do this, check

Start checkbox and set the start date and time (UTC) of the updating object display.

Check End checkbox and set the updating object display end date and time.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing Updating Objects

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in Text input line (information
will be displayed on the chart).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in Info field

(information will not be displayed unless Info function is used).

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in Depth line.

Check Danger checkbox as required (“Danger to navigation” attribute).

Files are attached/detached (“Attached file” attribute) in a separate step.

Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have made: “Manual
Correction” panel will open up.
To attach files to the updating object (“attached file” attribute), press
Attachments button in the left bottom corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the edited

object and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The screen will display a window with a list of files available for
attaching/detaching (to view the contents of the selected file, press View
button on the pertinent panel). The list of files available for attaching is
formed in the Data Tool utility.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 167

Editing Updating Objects

To attach a file (group of files) to the updating object, select it in Available

files group and press Attach >> button.

The file (group of files) will move to Attached files group. Press Apply button to
confirm changes you have made.

To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in Attached files
group and press << Detach button. The file (group of files) will move to
Available files group. Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have
made.

Press Save button.

The procedure of a editing a line or area type object is completed.

Editing Object Coordinates

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing Updating Objects

Press Shift Object button in the top left part of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object to be shifted
(the first character of a text object or a point in a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball/mouse button. Position the marker, which will
appear, in the new object coordinates within the displayed Chart
panel.

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the object will move to the specified coordinates.
Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the mode of
editing of the updating object coordinates.

Press Save button.

Deleting Updating Object

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 169

Editing Updating Objects

Press Delete Object button in the left part of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object to be deleted
(the first character of a text object or a point in a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the presentation of the object will be
removed from the Chart panel.
Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the updating object deleting mode.

Press Save button.

Restore the Deleted Object

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing Updating Objects

Press Deleted button in the top part of the panel. The screen will
display all the previously deleted objects shown in the grey
colour.

Press Restore Object button in the left bottom part of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the deleted object

(the first character of a text object or a corner point of a line or area type object).
Press the left trackball/mouse button: “Deleted object” attribute is
removed, and the object is highlighted in accordance with the
previously made settings.

Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the deleted object restore mode.

Press Save button.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 171

Search for Updating Objects

SEARCH FOR UPDATING OBJECTS

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open “Manual Correction” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS

LIST menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the bottom part of the panel to switch to “Find object” page.

Select the required updating object in the left-hand part of the page and press

the left trackball/mouse button. Coordinates of the selected object will be

displayed in the right-hand part of the page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Search for Updating Objects

A double click of the left trackball/mouse button on the selected object

line or its coordinates displays this object in the centre of the Chart
panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10 seconds.
With the selection of line or area type objects, the right-hand part of the
page displays coordinates of all the points, which the line/area type
object consists of.

A double click of the left trackball/mouse button on the coordinates of

any point which the line/area type object consists of, displays this point
in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10
seconds.

Chapter 7. Manual Updating 173

CHAPTER 8

Handling of User Charts

This chapter describes the procedure used

in the handling or user charts.

Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Creating and Saving User Charts

CREATING AND SAVING USER CHARTS

Creating and Plotting User Chart Objects

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.
The user chart creating procedure consists of four stages:

selection of the object category and type;

assigning of attributes to the object (except “Attached files”);

plotting of an object;

assigning of file attribute “Attached file”.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 177

Creating and Saving User Charts

Selection of the Object Category and Type

Use the tab in the user chart object selection area, to select the object category:

Symbols category:

To select the object type in “Symbols” tab, which will open up, press
the button with its picture.

Lines category:

To select the object type in “Lines” tab, which will open up, press the
button with its picture.

Text category:

Use the input line of “Text” tab, which will open up, to enter the required text.
Depth category:

Use the input line of “Depth” tab, which will open up, to enter the
required distinctive depth value.

Circles category:

To select the necessary object in “Circles” tab, press the button with its picture.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating and Saving User Charts

Assigning Attributes to the Selected Object

Select the colour (“Object colour” attribute) in the palette under the
category selection group.

Open attribute group (if not yet displayed on the panel) by pressing Attributes
button to the right of the palette.

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in Text input line (information will be
displayed on the chart).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in

Info field (information will not be displayed unless Info function is
used).

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in Depth line.

Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the user chart object.

Plotting of the Selected Object

To plot the selected object on the chart, press New Object button.

Position the cursor, which will appear on the graphic screen, in the required coordinates.

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the point type object will be set in the
specified coordinates.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 179

Creating and Saving User Charts

To set lines and areas, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor

to the next point and press the left button again. Repeat the procedure until
you set the required number of point.

After the input of the last point of the line or area, press the right
trackball/mouse button: the cursor will change its form and the object will
be set in the specified coordinates:

line by the specified points;

area by the points, the first and the last of them connected.
Assigning “Attached File” Attribute

To assign “Attached file” attribute, the selected object should be plotted on the chart.

To attach files (*.txt, *.rtf, *.bmp, *.doc, *.gif, *.jpg,

*.tif, *.pdf) to the user chart object (“attached files” attribute), press
Attachments button in the left bottom part of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object and
press the left trackball/mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating and Saving User Charts

The screen will display a window with lists of all the files available for attaching

(to view the contents of the selected file, press View button on the appropriate panel).

The list of files available for attaching is formed in the Data Tool utility.

To attach a file (group of files) to the user chart object, select it in Available
files group and press Attach >> button.

The file (group of files) will move to Attached files group. Press Apply button to
confirm the changes you have made.

To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in Attached files
group and press << Detach button. The file (group of files) will move to
Available files group. Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have
made.

The procedure of creating and plotting a user chart object is completed.

Saving the User Chart

Use the procedure detailed above to create and plot the required number
of user chart objects.

Enter comments on the created chart as required, in the comment input line.

Enter the user chart name in the name input line and press Save
button, which will be enabled.

The user chart will be saved, Load Chart button will display the
name of the saved chart.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 181

Editing User Chart Objects

Turning On/Off the Display of Updating

Objects and Their Attributes

To turn on/off the display of user chart objects categories on the ECDIS task
screen, press Show Objects button.

Check the checkboxes of necessary user chart objects categories.

To turn on/off the display of user chart objects attributes on the ECDIS task
screen, press the following buttons:

Show Attributes – to turn on the display of “Text” and “Depth”

attributes (selected from the list);

Attachments – to turn on the highlighting of objects with attached files;

Deleted – to turn on the highlighting of deleted object;

Colour – to turn on the orange coloured lighting of all the user chart objects.

EDITING USER CHART OBJECTS

Editing Point Type Objects

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.
In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing User Chart Objects

Load the user chart containing the object you are going to edit. To do this,

press Load Chart button and select the chart name from the list, which will open up.

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Press Edit Object button in the top left corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object (in case of text objects,
the acquisition point is the first character) and press the left trackball/mouse button.
The bottom part of the screen will display a panel for editing user chart objects.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 183

Editing User Chart Objects

Change the object type as required; to do this, use the tab in the user
chart object selection area to select the object category:

Symbols category:

In “Symbols” tab, which will open, select the new object type by
pressing the button with its picture.

Text category:

Use the input line of “Text” tab, which will open up, to enter the required text.

Depth category:

Use the input line of “Depth” tab, which will open up, enter the
required distinctive depth value.
Select the user chart object colour (“Object colour” attribute) from the
palette under the object category selection area.

Open the attribute area (if not yet displayed on the panel) by pressing
Attributes button to the right of the palette.

Edit the necessary attributes of the user chart object.

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in Text input line (information will be
displayed on the chart).

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing User Chart Objects

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in Info field

(information will not be displayed unless Info function is used).

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in Depth line.

Files are attached/detached (“Attached file” attribute) in a separate step.

Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have made: “Add Info” panel will open up.
To attach files to the user chart object (“Attached file” attribute), press
Attachments button in the left bottom corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the edited object
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The screen will display a window with a list of files available for
attaching/detaching (to view the contents of the selected file, press View
button on the appropriate panel). The list of files available for attaching is
formed in the Data Tool utility.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 185

Editing User Chart Objects

To attach a file (group of files) to the user chart object, select it in Available
files group and press Attach >> button.

The file (group of files) will move to Attached files group. Press Apply button to
confirm the changes you have made.

To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in Attached files
group and press << Detach button. The file (group of files) will move to
Available files group. Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have
made.

Press Save button.

Editing Line, Circle and Area Type Objects

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.
In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.

Load the user chart containing the object you are going to edit. To do this, press
Load chart button and select the chart name from the list, which will open up.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing User Chart Objects

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Press Edit object button in the top left corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the line (object boundary)

and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The cursor will “acquire” the object and change own form.
If the object configuration is required to be changed, move the cursor to the
required coordinates. Press the left trackball/mouse button and repeat this
operation until the necessary configuration is set.

Press the right trackball/mouse button. The bottom part of the screen will
display a panel for the editing of user chart objects. Edit the object type
and its attributes.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 187

Editing User Chart Objects

Change the object type as required in “Lines” or “Circles” tab; to

do this, press the button with its picture in the user chart object
selection area.

In the palette under the object category selection area, select the colour of
the line or area type object (“Object colour” attribute).

Open the attribute area (if not yet displayed on the panel) by
pressing Attributes button to the right of the palette.
Edit the necessary attributes of the user chart object.

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in Text input line (information
will be displayed on the chart).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in

Info field (information will not be displayed unless Info function is
used).

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in Depth line.

Files are attached/detached (“Attached file” attribute) in a separate step.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing User Chart Objects

Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have made: “Add Info”
panel will open up.

To attach files to the user chart object (“Attached file”

attribute), press Attachments button in the left bottom corner of
the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the edited object
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The screen will display a window with a list of files available for
attaching/detaching (to view the contents of the selected file, press View
button on the pertinent panel). The list of files available for attaching is
formed in the Data Tool utility.

To attach a file (group of files) to the user chart object, select it in Available
files group and press Attach >> button.

The file (group of files) will move to Attached files group. Press Apply button to
confirm the changes you have made.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 189

Editing User Chart Objects

To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in Attached files
group and press << Detach button. The file (group of files) will move to
Available files group. Press Apply button to confirm the changes you have
made.

Press Save button.

Editing User Chart Object Coordinates

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.
Load the user chart containing the object whose coordinates you are
going to edit. To do this, press Load Chart button and select the chart name
from the list, which will open up.

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Press Shift Object button in the top left part of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object to be

shifted (the first character of a text object or a point in a line or area
type object).

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing User Chart Objects

Press the left trackball/mouse button. Position the marker, which will
appear, in the new object coordinates within the displayed Chart
panel.

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the object will move to the specified coordinates.
Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the mode of editing of
the user chart object coordinates.

Deleting the User Chart Object

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 191

Editing User Chart Objects

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.

Load the user chart containing the object you are going to delete. To do
this, press Load chart button and select the chart name from the list, which
will open up.

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Press Delete Object button in the left part of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object to be deleted
(the first character of a text object or a point in a line or area type object).
Press the left trackball/mouse button: the presentation of the object will be
removed from the Chart panel.

Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the user chart object deleting mode.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing User Chart Objects

Restore the Deleted User Chart Object

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.
Load the user chart containing the object you are going to restore. To do
this, press Load chart button and select the chart name from the list, which
will open up.

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Press Deleted button in the top part of the panel. The screen will
display all the previously deleted objects shown in the grey
colour.

Press Restore Object button in the left bottom part of the panel.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 193

Merging Two User Charts

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the deleted object

(the first character of a text object or a corner point of a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball/mouse button: “Deleted object” attribute is

removed, and the object is highlighted in accordance with the
previously made settings.

Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the deleted user
chart object restore mode.

MERGING TWO USER CHARTS

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A active layer window. Press ON button to activate it.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Merging Two User Charts

Load the user chart containing objects, which will be copied to another chart. To do this,
press Load chart button and select the chart name from the list, which will open up.

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Use the tab in the top part of the panel to select B active layer window.

Press ON button to activate it.

Load the user chart. To do this, press Load Chart button and select the
chart name from the list, which will open up.

The screen will display presentations of the previously plotted user chart objects.

B layer user chart has the appearance as shown below.

As B layer is shown simultaneously with A layer, you will see the
following presentation on the Chart panel.

Press Merge button in the top left part of the panel. A layer chart merges with
B layer chart, and a new chart is formed in the active layer (which marked
with the tab).

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 195

Deleting User Charts

Enter the name of the new user chart in the name input line and press
Save button which will be activated.

The user chart will be saved, and Load Chart button will display the saved chart name.

DELETING USER CHARTS

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, press Delete chart button.
Select the chart name from the list, which will open up.

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

In the window, which will appear, press “Yes” button to confirm the
deleting of the user chart. The chart will be deleted.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Search for User Chart Objects

SEARCH FOR USER CHART OBJECTS

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open “Add Info” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Add Info” panel, which will open up, use the tab in the top left part of
the panel to select A or B active layer window. Press ON button to activate
it.
Load the user chart containing the object required to be found. To do
this, press Load chart button and select the chart name from the list,
which will open up.

The screen will display presentation of the previously plotted user chart objects.

Use the tab in the bottom part of the panel to switch to “Find object” page.

Chapter 8. Handling of User Charts 197

Search for User Chart Objects

Select the required user chart object in the left-hand part of the page and
press the left trackball/mouse button. Coordinates of the selected object
will be displayed in the right-hand part of the page.

A double click of the left trackball/mouse button on the selected object

line or its coordinates displays this object in the centre of the Chart
panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10 seconds.
With the selection of line or area type objects, the right-hand part of the page
displays coordinates of all the points, which the line/area type object consists of.

A double click of the left trackball/mouse button on the coordinates of

any point which the line/area type object consists of, displays this point
in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10
seconds.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

CHAPTER 9

Handling of Routes
This chapter describes the procedure used

in the handling of routes and schedules.

Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Creating a Route

CREATING A ROUTE

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the right part of “Route Editor” panel to switch to “Extra” page.

The following buttons for turning on the display of Waypoint options on the
ECDIS screen are pressed by default:

XTD – to display on the electronic chart safety lines for the active route;

Arrival Circle – to display on the electronic chart change-of-WPT

circle for the active route;

Turns – to display on the electronic chart the turn radius arc for the active route.

If necessary, press Name button to turn on the display of waypoints’

names on the ECDIS screen.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 201

Creating a Route

In “Route Editor” panel, press New button to display a blank table for the
generation of a new route.

Route and schedule elements table can contain the following data (by columns):

WPT – WPT number;

Name – WPT name set by the operator manually;

LAT – WPT latitude coordinate set by the operator manually, or

automatically with the use of the graphic editor;

LON – WPT longitude coordinate set by the operator manually, or

automatically with the use of the graphic editor;

RL/GC – route leg type from the previous to the current WPT, set by the
operator; all route leg calculations are referred to the WGS-84 reference
datum;

Distance – distance from the previous to the current WPT;

Course – course from the previous to the current WPT;

Total Distance – summary distance between the initial (0) and current
WPT by the route legs;

PORT XTD – safe zone to the left of the route leg, set by the operator;

STBD XTD – safe zone to the right of the route leg, set by the operator;

Arrival Circle – radius of a circle whose crossing initiates the

change of the current WPT if the route is used as the
monitored route;

Turn Radius – operator-set radius of the arc for the display of an

approximate ship track on the turn;

Time Zone – operator-set time zone (switching of the ship time) in the given WPT;

ETA – estimated time of arrival in a WPT;

Stay – estimated time of stay in the given WPT;

ETD – estimated time of departure from the given WPT;

TTG – time underway from the previous to the given WPT;

Total Time – total time underway from the start point (0) to the given
WPT, time of stays taken into account;

Draught – manual input of the ship draft on each leg;

UKС – under-keel clearance obtained from the schedule calculations

based on the individual chart depths;

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating a Route

Speed – speed on the route leg from the previous to the given WPT;

Average Speed – average speed of sailing from the start point to the given WPT.

Graphic Method

Use of Standard Graphic Cursor

After a press on the New button, a graphic cursor will appear on the
Chart panel, whereas the right bottom part of the ECDIS task screen will
display Edit Route information window.

Set the cursor in the start point coordinates by moving the

trackball/mouse, using the data in Edit Route window, and press the left
trackball/mouse button.
The symbol of the start point with its number (“0”) will appear on the Chart
panel. Position the cursor in the coordinates of the next point. At this stage,
a route leg line will be drawn between the cursor and the start point. Press
the left trackball/mouse button: the Chart panel will display the next point
symbol with “1” for number

and the plotted route leg. By default, XTD lines are also shown. To turn
off their display, use “Extra” page.

If it is necessary to set several waypoints, repeat the trackball/mouse

moving and left button pressing operation as many times as there are
WPT’s required to be set.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 203

Creating a Route

If the cursor is positioned beyond the Chart panel boundaries, it will be

re-drawn automatically so that there is always a chart from the chart folio
under the cursor (provided Chart Autoload function is “ON”).

After the setting of the last point of the planned route, double click the
right trackball/mouse button: the cursor will exit from the route
planning and editing mode and will assume the form of the ECDIS
task free cursor.
The generation of the route is completed. To save the route, enter
its name in the name input line in the top right part of the panel.

Press Save button which has been activated. The networked route will be
saved in all the WS’s.

Use of Additional Graphic Cursor

Use the tab in the top part of “Route Editor” panel, which will open up,
to switch to “Options” page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating a Route

By default, the Standard cursor mode is set, whereby the cursor has the form
of intersecting lines corresponding to the latitude and longitude of the
cursor indicated point. Select Advanced cursor by choosing the appropriate
option button.

To turn on additional graphic cursor tools, check the appropriate checkboxes:

Head mark – to display the line ahead of the cursor position in the
direction of the plotted route leg;

Stern mark – to display a line opposite to the Head Mark from a waypoint;

Mark – to display two additional lines setting their angles relative to Head Mark line;

Distance – to display and set range marks on the cursor lines.

The advanced capabilities of the graphic cursor prove to be useful in, e.g.
planning a route along the lead lines.
Plotting the Route Using Lighthouse Lighting

Where it is necessary to plot waypoints taking into account the lighthouse

visibility range, check Show sectors checkbox and set the value of the sectors’
visibility range. As the graphic cursor gets within the lighthouse visibility
range, the lighthouse

is lighted on the Chart panel. The colour of the lighting line is

determined by the lighthouse sector colour.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 205

Creating a Route

Setting Wheel Over Point

Where it is necessary to plot waypoints taking into account the ship’s turn
radius, check Wheel over checkbox in the Set point group.

Setting of Reference Point on the Chart Panel

To set a base point on the ECDIS task Chart panel, which will be used in the
plotting and editing of routes, press Set button in Anchor group. Position the
cursor

on the necessary point on the ECDIS task Chart panel and press the
left trackball/mouse button. The base point symbol (anchor) will appear
in the base point, whereas Anchor group coordinate boxes will display its
coordinates.

To cancel the display of the base point, press Clear button in Anchor group.
Tabular Method

After a press on the New button, a graphic cursor will appear on the Chart
panel. Click the right trackball/mouse button: the cursor will exit from the
route planning and editing mode and will assume the form of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to “Extra” page and press

Columns button:

In the list, which will open up, select lines with the names of required route elements.

The corresponding columns will remain the route element table.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Creating a Route

Enter the route start point (“0” row). To do this, perform the procedures detailed below:

position the cursor on Name element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

• enter the WPT name; press <Enter> key;

position the cursor on LAT element cell. Double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

enter the latitude coordinate and press the

right trackball/mouse button;

• press “Apply” button to confirm the changes you have made;

position the cursor on LON element cell; double click the

left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

enter the longitude coordinate and press the

right trackball/mouse button;
• press “Apply” button to confirm the changes you have made;

position the cursor on RL/GC element cell; double click the

left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

press the button in the right-hand part of the cell and

select the sailing type from the list which will open up;

press the left trackball/mouse button to confirm the

changes you have made;

there is no editing of course and range cells;

position the cursor on PORT XTD element cell; double click the
left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit XTD value to the left of the route leg; press the
left trackball/mouse button;

position the cursor on STBD XTD element cell; double click the
left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit XTD value to the right of the route leg; press the
left trackball/mouse button;

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 207

Route Loading and Unloading

position the cursor on Arrival Circle element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

enter the radius value for the WPT change circle; press the
left trackball/mouse button;

position the cursor on Turn Radius element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

enter the radius for the arc of the suitable ship track

on the turning circle; press the left trackball/mouse button.

The remaining cells are filled in at the time when the schedule is drawn.

Enter the rest of the WPT’s.

The route generation is completed. To save the route, enter its name in
the name input line in the top part of the panel.

Press Save button, which has been activated. The networked route will
be saved in all the WS’s.

ROUTE LOADING AND UNLOADING

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.
In “Route Editor” panel, press Load Route button to activate it.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Route Loading and Unloading

In the list, which will open up, select the route required to be loaded in
edition mode, and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Several routes can be loaded simultaneously in the editing mode. As a button

with route name is pressed, the route becomes active and can be edited in
the table or on the ECDIS task screen by using the graphic editor.

To quick load the necessary route to monitoring mode, select it from the
routes loaded in edition mode and press Activate Route Monitor button (see
also paragraph Navigational Tasks, item Loading of Route and Schedule

in the Navigation Mode):

To unload the route, press Unload Route button:

In the list, which will open up, select the route required to be unloaded,
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 209

Fast Route Search

FAST ROUTE SEARCH

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel, load the necessary route.

Press Focus on Route button. The Chart panel will display the entire
route on the suitable scale chart.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Route Editing

ROUTE EDITING

Graphic Route Editing Method

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel, load the necessary route.

Press WPT Editor button. An acquisition marker will appear in the Chart
panel, whereas the right bottom part of the ECDIS task screen will
display Edit Route information window.

Edit Route window displays marker coordinates.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 211

Route Editing

Changing Coordinates of an Existing WPT

Position the acquisition marker on the WPT to be edited.

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the marker will acquire the WPT and
change own form.

Move the acquired WPT to the required place. As the WPT coordinates
change, the adjacent route legs will change, too.

Press the left trackball/mouse button.

The WPT will be set in the new coordinates.

Setting a New WPT

Position the acquisition marker on the route leg where a new WPT is required to be set.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Route Editing

Press the left trackball/mouse button: a new WPT will be set. The
marker will acquire the new WPT and change own form.

Move the acquired WPT to the necessary place.

As the WPT coordinates change, the adjacent route legs will change,
too. Press the left trackball/mouse button. The new WPT will be set in
the specified coordinates.
Deleting a WPT

Position the acquisition marker on the WPT to be deleted.

Press the left trackball/mouse button: the marker will acquire the WPT and
change own form.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 213

Route Editing

Press the right trackball/mouse button. The point will be deleted, and the
adjacent route legs will be combined to form one.

Press the right trackball/mouse button to exit from the editing mode. The
marker will assume the shape of the ECDIS task free cursor.

Save the route as required by pressing Save button in the top right part of the panel.

Tabular Method of Route Editing

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel, load the necessary route.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Route Editing

Edit the existing route by using the following procedures.

Changing Coordinates and Route Elements for an Existing WPT

position the cursor on Name element cell;

double click the left trackball/mouse button
to activate the cell;

• edit the WPT name; press <Enter> key;

position the cursor on LAT element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

edit the latitude coordinate and press the

right trackball/mouse button;

• press “Apply” button to confirm the changes you have made;

position the cursor on LON element cell; double click the
left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit the longitude coordinate and press the

right trackball/mouse button;

• press “Apply” button to confirm the changes you have made;

position the cursor on RL/GC element cell; double click the

left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

press the button in the right-hand part of the cell and

select the sailing type from the list which will open up;

press the left trackball/mouse button to confirm the

changes you have made;

there is no editing of course or range cells;

position the cursor on PORT XTD element cell; double click the
left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit XTD value to the left of the route leg; press the
left trackball/mouse button;

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 215

Route Editing

position the cursor on STBD. XTD element cell; double click the
left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit XTD value to the right of the route leg; press the
left trackball/mouse button;

Position the cursor on Arrival Circle element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

edit the radius value for the WPT change circle; press the
left trackball/mouse button;

position the cursor on Turn Radius element cell; double

click the eft trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

edit the radius for the arc of the suitable ship track

on the turning circle; press the left trackball/mouse button.

Edit other WPT’s.

Setting a New WPT

Position the cursor on the cell with the number of the WPT before which a
new WPT is required to be added, press the left trackball/mouse button.
This WPT line will be highlighted in colour.
Press <Insert> key of the computer keyboard or press the right
trackball/mouse button and select NEW context menu item. A new line
containing the same data as the old one will be displayed, whereas the old
line will be assigned the next number.

Edit the route element value.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Route Editing

Deleting a WPT

Position the cursor on the cell with the number of the WPT required to be
deleted, press the left trackball/mouse button. This WPT line will be
highlighted in colour.

Press <Delete> key on the computer keyboard or press the right

trackball/mouse button and select DELETE WPT context menu item. The
selected line will be deleted, those following it will be re-numbered.
All the changes in the table will be reflected accordingly on the graphic screen.

Save the route as required by pressing Save button in the top right part of the panel.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 217

Route Approval and Protection

ROUTE APPROVAL AND PROTECTION

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel load the necessary route.

Protecting Route from Editing

Use the tab in the top part of “Route Editor” panel to switch to “Extra” page.

Press Protect button in Protection Control group. The route will be protected
from editing, and the letter “[P]” will be added to its name.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Route Approval and Protection

Route Approval

Use the tab in the top part of “Route Editor” panel to switch to “Extra” page.
ATTENTION!

For the route to be approved, it should be checked for dangers to navigation

on “Check” page of “Route Editor” panel.

Press Activate button in Protection Control group. The route will be

approved, and the letter “[A]” will be added to its name.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 219

Creating Reciprocal Route

CREATING RECIPROCAL ROUTE

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel, load the necessary route.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to
“Extra” page and press Reciprocal button.

A route will be created with the WPT order inverse to that in the active route.

All the changes in the table will be shown accordingly on the Chart panel.

Save the route as required by pressing Save button in the top right part of the panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Merging Routes

MERGING ROUTES

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel, load the route to whose last point

another route should be connected.
Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to
“Extra” page, and press Link to button.

In the list, which will open up, select the route, which will be connected to
the last point of the loaded route. Press the left trackball/mouse button.

WPT’s of the connected route will be added to the table of route elements.

All the changes in the table will be shown accordingly on the Chart panel.

Save the route as required by pressing Save button in the top right part of the panel.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 221

Deleting a Route

DELETING A ROUTE

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of “Route Editor” panel, which will
open up, to switch to “Extra” page.

In the opened “Extra” page, press Delete button.

Select the route, which should be deleted, from the list and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

In the window, which will appear, confirm the deleting. The route will be deleted.

ATTENTION!

The route can not be deleted until it is loaded into monitoring or editing mode.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Transmitting Route to an External Device

TRANSMITTING ROUTE TO AN EXTERNAL DEVICE

ATTENTION!

For the route to be transmitted to an external device (“UPLOAD_ROUTE”

port), the external device is required to be connected in the System
Configuration utility. (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V.
2.00.009). INSTALLATION

GUIDE, Chapter 2, section NS 4000 Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings).

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of “Route Editor” panel, to switch to “Extra” page.

In the opened “Extra” page, press Upload Route button.

Select the route required to be transmitted and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The route will be passed to the external device.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 223

Checking and Editing the Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation

CHECKING AND EDITING THE ROUTE TAKING

INTO ACCOUNT DANGERS TO NAVIGATION

ATTENTION!

The check of a route for the availability of objects representing danger to

navigation, is made by using the safety parameters set in “Navigational
Alarms” page of “Monitoring” panel.

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel load the route, which should be checked for the
availability of dangers to navigation.
Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to “Check” page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Checking and Editing the Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation

“Check” page serves for checking the generated route for the dangers to navigation.

The page contains the following elements:

Check Editor – to turn on the check of the active route leg during its generation
(or editing) for the availability of dangers to navigation; safety parameters
are set on “Navigational Alarms” page of “Monitoring” panel (see
document

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 4, section Main Alarms and Warnings

Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alarms);

Check Route Planning – to turn on the check of the entire active route for
dangers to navigation; safety parameters are set on “Navigational
Alarms” page
of “Monitoring” panel (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 4, section Main

Alarms and Warnings Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alarms);

Stop – to interrupt manually the check of the entire active route for the
availability of dangers to navigation;

<> – to view, one by one in the information window, messages on the

identified dangers to navigation;

Accept – to confirm the end of the check mode;

Edit – to turn on the graphic editor in Check Editor mode for the route
correction taking into account all the detected dangers to navigation;

Show on chart – to display and highlight the detected dangers to

navigation on the original scale chart;

Safety parameters – to display the list of main safety parameters set on “Safety
Alarms” page of “Monitoring” panel, which are used in the route check.
Check Check Editor checkbox and press Check Route Planning button. The route
will be checked for availability of dangers to navigation.
The check process is shown in the display window. After the end of check,
“Check” page will display a message about detected dangers or about no
dangers having been found.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 225

Checking and Editing the Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation

Viewing Dangers to Navigation

To view the detected dangers to navigation, use buttons to select

the danger you are interested in, and press Show on chart button. The
danger to navigation will be displayed in the centre of the Chart
panel, shown within a flashing circle.

If the route needs no editing, press Accept button to exit from the route check mode.

Editing Route if Dangers to Navigation are Detected

To edit route to take into account the detected dangers to navigation, use
buttons to select the required danger and press Edit button (Check Editor
checkbox must be checked). An acquisition marker will appear on the Chart
panel in the point with coordinates of the detected danger to navigation.
Edit the route leg according to the editing rules so that the route leg does
not pass through the dangerous place. E.g., change the WPT position.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Checking and Editing the Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation

After the route leg editing is completed, press the left trackball/mouse
button. The edited route legs will be checked, and the next danger to
navigation will be backlighted on the Chart panel.

If no dangers to navigation are identified on the edited route leg, an

appropriate message will be displayed in “Check” page.

Press Accept button: there will be a check of the following route legs.
Perform the editing until the end of the route. If there are no dangers
to navigation on the route, “Check” page will display an appropriate
message.

To exit from the check mode, press Accept button.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 227

Displaying Route Parameters as Excel Table

DISPLAYING ROUTE PARAMETERS AS EXCEL TABLE

ATTENTION!

This function is not available unless the station has appropriate software (MS Excel).

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel load the route, which should be converted to Excel.
Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to
“Extra” page, and press Route to Table button.

The screen will display Excel table containing the selected route parameters.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Drawing Schedules

This table will be automatically saved in the ECDIS task memory in the form

of Excel file (*.xls). These files are handled via the Data Tool utility in Route Excel group.

DRAWING SCHEDULES

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.
In “Route Editor” panel load the route, which the schedule will be drawn for.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to “Extra” page,
and press Columns button.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 229

Drawing Schedules

In the list, which will open up, select lines with the names of the required
schedule elements. The corresponding columns will appear in the table on
“Route Editor” panel.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to

“Schedule” page, and press Clear button.
To draw a new schedule, press New button.

Enter the schedule elements for the WPT’s. To do this, perform the
procedures detailed below:

position the cursor on Time Zone element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

enter the time zone set in this WPT and press the
right trackball/mouse button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Drawing Schedules

position the cursor on ETA element cell

(not set for the route start point). Double click

the left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

enter ETA for this WPT and press the

right trackball/mouse button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;

position the cursor on Stay element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

enter the time of stay at this WPT and press the

right trackball/mouse button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;

position the cursor on ETD element cell (not

set for the route end point); double click
the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

enter ETD for the WPT and press the right

trackball/mouse button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;

there is no editing of TTG, Total Time, UKC or Average Speed cells;

position the cursor on Draught element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

enter the draught value on the route leg; press the

left trackball/mouse button;

position the cursor on Speed element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

enter the speed value on the route leg; press the

left trackball/mouse button.
ATTENTION!

For the route start point, ETD value should always be specified. For the end
point, it is necessary to specify ETA or speed of proceeding along the route
legs.

For the current conditions to be taken into account in the schedule

calculations, check Tidal Current, Surface Current and Calculate UKC
checkboxes.

Press Calculate button: the schedule will be calculated.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 231

Drawing Schedules

The schedule calculation process is reflected in the display window. In

the table, empty cells will be filled in with the calculated schedule
elements.
A schedule line has been created. To save the schedule, enter its name in
the name input line in “Schedule” page.

Press Save button, which has been activated.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing a Schedule

EDITING A SCHEDULE

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel load the route, which the schedule will be drawn for.
Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel and press the button with
the name of the loaded schedule in the top part of the “Schedule” page.

In the list which will open up, select the schedule which should be edited,
and press the left trackball/mouse button. The selected schedule will be
loaded in the table. In “Schedule” page, Tidal Current, Surface Current and
Calculate UKC checkboxes will be checked/unchecked like at the time when
the selected schedule was drawn.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 233

Editing a Schedule

To edit schedule elements, perform the procedures detailed below. With a

change in any of the elements, all the cells containing calculated data are
cleared (data entered by the operator when the schedule was drawn, will
remain):

position the cursor on Time Zone element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

edit the time zone which will be set in the given

WPT and press the right trackball/mouse
button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;

position the cursor on ETA element (not set for the

route start point); double click the left
trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit ETA for the WPT and press the right

trackball/mouse button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;

position the cursor on Stay element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate
the cell;

edit the time of stay in the given WPT and press the
right trackball/mouse button;

• press “Apply” button to confirm the changes you have made;

position the cursor on ETD element cell (not set for the
end WPT); double click the left trackball/mouse
button to activate the cell;

edit ETD for this WPT and press the right

trackball/mouse button;

press “Apply” button to confirm the

changes you have made;
there is no editing of TTG, Total Time, UKC or Average Speed
cells;

position the cursor on Draught element cell; double

click the left trackball/mouse button to activate the
cell;

enter the draught value on the route leg; press the

left trackball/mouse button;

position the cursor on Speed element cell; double click the

left trackball/mouse button to activate the cell;

edit the speed value on the route leg; press the

left trackball/mouse button.

ATTENTION!

For the route start point, ETD value should always be specified. For the end
point, it is necessary to specify ETA or speed of proceeding along the route
legs.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Editing a Schedule

Check/uncheck checkboxes in “Schedule” page as required for the tidal and

surface currents to be taken into account.

Press Calculate button. The schedule will be re-calculated.

The schedule re-calculation process is reflected in the display window. In

the table, empty cells will be filled in with new schedule element values.
Editing of the schedule is completed. The edited schedule is saved
automatically under its old name. To save the schedule under a new
name, enter it in the name input line in “Schedule” page.

Press Save button, which has been activated.

The schedule will be saved.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 235

Deleting Schedules

DELETING SCHEDULES

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel load the route, which the schedule will be delete.
Use the tab in the right-hand part of “Route Editor” panel to switch to
“Schedule” page, and press Delete Schedule button.

Note: The schedule to be deleted should not be loaded, otherwise load

another schedule (see the previous item).

Select the schedule, which should be deleted, from the list and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Quick Distance Calculator

QUICK DISTANCE CALCULATOR

Open “Route Editor” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST
menu on the Control panel.

In “Route Editor” panel, load the necessary route.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the panel to switch to “Schedule” page.

In the bottom part of the page there is Quick distance calculator group.

Use From drop-down list to select the number of the waypoint which
calculations of the desired distance are started at.

Use To drop-down list to select the number of the waypoint where calculations

of the desired distance are ended. Distance window will display a value of
the route segment length between the two waypoints.

Chapter 9. Handling of Routes 237

CHAPTER 10

Handling Radar Information

and Target Designation Units
This chapter describes the procedure used in the
handling of radar information and target designation
units.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Radar Overlay

RADAR OVERLAY

Work with Radar Overlay

To select a scanner, press the TX button in the “Sensors and Network”

window of the Control panel.

Select the necessary scanner.

To turn on the radar picture, press Overlay button.

A radar picture will appear on the Chart panel.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select Radar Settings line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 241
Radar Overlay

In “Radar Settings” display which will open up, set the range scale. To
do this, use the buttons to the right of Range input window.

Turn on display of range rings as required. To do this, press Show button to

the right of Rings window.

Set the required brightness, gain, suppression of rain and sea clutter
by using the buttons on the sides of level indicators.

To enter the required “transparency” value, use the buttons (from 0 –

opaque to 3 – almost transparent) in Transparency group.
To set the required rectangular area of the radar picture display, press
Set button in Overlay window group.

A graphic cursor will appear in the chart screen area. Position the cursor in the initial
point of the area and press the left trackball/mouse button. Set the required radar
picture area by moving the cursor, keeping the left trackball/mouse button depressed.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Radar Overlay

Press the trackball/mouse button again. The area will be set.

Turn on and adjust the scan-to-scan correlation function as required. To

do this, press the button in Accumulation group.

In the list, which will open up, select the necessary value (from 20 to 100)
or None to switch the function off. Press the left trackball/mouse button to
confirm selection.

Press the required colour button in Echo colour button group to set the
colour of the radar picture.
The adjustment of the radar picture is completed.

Distance and Bearing Offset

ATTENTION!

Distance and Bearing Offset is only made on the WS which the RIB is installed on.

Introduction

Adjustment of the RIB in azimuth, i.e. an offset to the fixed azimuth errors of
the radar antenna. The magnitude of the offset is determined as the
difference between

the bearing value of a clearly observed and uniquely identified stationary

radar object measured on the chart or by using other measurement method,
and a mean value of several bearing measurements made for the same
object by using the RIB. The offset corresponds to the value of an angle,
which the picture should be turned to in the clockwise direction for it to
match the actual situation. The offset is entered with an accuracy of up to
one tenth of a degree.

Adjustment of the RIB in range, i.e. an offset to the delays in the radar and
RIB circuits. The magnitude of the offset is determined by comparing the
results of range measurements made for clearly observed and uniquely
identified stationary radar objects by using the RIB radar picture, and
measurements made on the chart or by using other methods. The offset is
entered with an accuracy of up to 1 m.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 243
Radar Overlay

Distance and Bearing Offset Setting

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Radar settings” page.

Uncheck Read only checkbox and enter a password:

Press “OK”.

Press Change button.

Use EBL 1 to measure the bearing to the electronic chart object

used for the adjustment purposes. Use EBL 2 to measure the
bearing to the echo of the object used for the adjustment purposes.

Calculate the Bearing Offset value as the difference between the EBL 1
and EBL 2 readouts, and enter it in Bearing box.

Use VRM1 to measure the distance to the electronic chart object used for the
adjustment purposes. Use VRM2 to measure the distance to the echo of

the object used for the adjustment purposes. Calculate the Distance Offset
value as the difference between the VRM1 and VRM2 readouts, and enter it
in Distance box.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ARPA

Press Apply button.

Make several iterations as required, achieving the maximum possible

alignment of the radar picture and chart information.

ATTENTION!

In making the adjustment, use the differential positioning mode in order to

obtain the required accuracy.

The adjustment is made by using the radar observed conspicuous features whose polar
coordinates are known with accuracy not inferior to 0.1° in azimuth and 2 m in range.

ARPA

Target Display

There are three ways to turn on/off the display of ARPA targets on the
ECDIS task screen:

Open “Targets” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
In Show Target group of “Targets” panel, which will open up, press ARPA button.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 245
ARPA

Press ARPA button in the “Sensors and Network” window of the Control panel.

Press <Target> key on the ES3/ES4/ES6 keyboard.

If there are some ARPA tracked targets, they will appear on the
Chart panel, whereas their motion parameters will be shown in the
target table.

Turn on, as required, the display of target tracks. To do this, press Tracks
button in Show Target group.

Target tracks will be displayed on the Chart panel.

ARPA Settings

To turn on the display of targets, press Overlay and ARPA

button in the “Sensors and Network” window of the
Control panel.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ARPA

In the list, which will open up, select TARGETS line and press the left
trackball/mouse button.

To Acquire Targets for Tracking

To switch the cursor to target acquisition mode, press Acquire

button in Targets group.

Position the cursor on the target and press the left trackball/mouse button.
In a minute, the acquired target will be displayed as a yellow
coloured circle with pre-calculated motion vector.

The target has been acquired for tracking. If you press the right
trackball/mouse button, the cursor exits from the target acquisition
mode.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 247
ARPA

To Cancel Tracked Targets

To switch the cursor to the target tracking cancelling mode, press Cancel
button in Targets group.

Position the cursor on the tracked target and press the left trackball/mouse button.

The target tracking will be cancelled.

If you press the right trackball/mouse button, the cursor exits from the
tracking cancelling mode.

To cancel tracking of all the previously acquired targets, press Cancel All
button in Targets group.

To Turn on Ring Shaped Guard Zones

To set the Guard Zone manually, press Guard Zone 1 or Guard Zone 2 buttons.

The ring shaped guard zone will be displayed on the ECDIS task screen.
Targets getting within the guard zone will be displayed in the form of
flickering circles.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ARPA

At the same time, Guard zone target alarm will be triggered off. Acknowledge
this alarm. After the processing, targets will be displayed in the form of
yellow coloured circles with pre-calculated motion vectors.

To Set Guard Zone Limits

To set guard zone limits, position the free cursor on the left-hand
boundary of the guard zone. As this is done, the cursor will assume
the following form:

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The cursor will assume

the form of a graphic cursor.
Move the ring shaped zone along the circle relative to the own ship
symbol in the required direction.

Press the left trackball/mouse button to set the new position of the zone
and to exit from the graphic cursor mode.

Position the free cursor on the right-hand boundary of the guard zone.

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 249
ARPA

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The cursor will assume the form of a graphic cursor.

Move the right-hand limit of the ring shaped zone setting the necessary coverage angle.
Press the left trackball/mouse button to set the new position of the zone
and to exit from the graphic cursor mode.

Position the free cursor on one of the arcs delimiting the guard zone.

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball/mouse button. The cursor will assume

the form of a graphic cursor.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

ARPA

Move the zone limit to the required distance.

Note: If the zone’s closer limit crosses its farther limit in the process of
zone shift, they exchange their places.

Press the left trackball/mouse button to set the new zone position and
exit from the graphic cursor mode.

To Turn Off Guard Zones

To turn off a guard zone, release the appropriate button.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 251
AIS

AIS

Handling AIS Targets

Target Display

There are three ways to turn on/off the display of AIS targets on the ECDIS task screen:

Open “Targets” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

In Show Target group of “Targets” panel, which will open up, press AIS button.
Press AIS button in the “Sensors and Network” window of the Control panel.

Press <Target on/off> key on the ES4/ES6 keyboard.

AIS targets will appear in the Chart panel and their motion
parameters will be displayed in the Targets Table.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

AIS

Display of AIS Target Identifiers

Press AIS Target identification button to select the AIS targets identifier.

In the list, which will open up, select the necessary identifier or None to declutter
the Chart panel. Press the left trackball/mouse button. Targets will be displayed

on the Chart panel with the selected identifier, and its name will be shown on the button.

Position the cursor on the target identifier in the Targets Table.

The hint will display the name of the AIS object if it is contained in the
messages transmitted by the AIS object.

Enter as required identifier “Alias” (up to 8 characters) for an AIS object in

Alias row of the Targets Table.
On the Chart panel, the target will be displayed with the entered “Alias”
identifier regardless of settings made in AIS Target identification group. This
identifier

is displayed on the Chart panel only and is not transmitted in messages.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 253
AIS

Display of Target Tracks

Turn on, as required, the display of target tracks. To do this, press Tracks
button in Show Target group.

Target tracks will be displayed on the Chart panel.

Prompt Target Search

Press the button with the target identifier in Name line of the Targets
Table, e.g. 316001696.

The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel
highlighted with a flashing circle.
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
AIS

Setting of Voyage Data

ATTENTION!

Setting of voyage data is available only at station with the status MASTER.

Open “AIS” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top left part of “AIS” panel to switch to “Voyage and
Static Data” page. Press Edit button.
In the left-hand part of “Voyage and Static Data” page, press Navigational status button.

In the list, which will open up, select the own ship navigation status
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Press Type of ship button in the left-hand part of the page.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 255
AIS

In the list, which will open up, select the own ship navigation status
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Press Cargo button in the left-hand part of the page (for ships carrying cargoes only).

In the list, which will open up, select the dangerous cargo category as
required and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Use Mean draught input line to enter the own ship mean draught value
and press the left trackball/mouse button.

Use Destination input line to enter the own ship port of

destination (not more than 20 symbols) and press the left
trackball/mouse button.
Use ETA line to enter the ETA (UTC) in the port of destination specified in
Destination line, and press <Enter> key. If the system (UTC) time value is
larger than

the entered ETA value, “Undefined” will be automatically set in ETA input line.

In Persons on board input line, enter the number of persons on board and
press the left trackball/mouse button.

Press Apply button.

ATTENTION!

Static Data area always displays own ship data, which is set on “Ship settings”
page of “INS” panel of the System Configuration utility and cannot be
changed in the ECDIS task. Where the transponder settings do no match
those in the ECDIS task, the own ship name and Call Sign are shown in red
colour.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

AIS

As other devices are connected to the AIS transponder in addition to the NS 4000 MFD
(e.g. MKD or pilot software), the own ship name and call sign in the transponder can be
changed by these users. The operator is notified about these changes

by AIS Name warning and AIS CALL warning warnings, which will remain active
until the own ship data is restored in the transponder. To restore the own
ship data settings in the transponder as per the settings in the System
Configuration utility, press Restore button.

The setting of own ship parameters transmitted in the AIS system is completed.

Transmission of Messages in AIS System

Turn on the display of AIS targets (see paragraph Handling AIS Targets).

Open “AIS” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Use the tab in the left-hand part of “AIS” panel to switch to “Messaging” page.

Transmission of Text

To prepare and transmit a text message, press Create Message button on

“Messaging” page in Send message group and select Safety Text.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 257
AIS

Press the left trackball/mouse button. Send Message window will open up,
specifying the type of the selected message.

Set the identifier of the addressee of the message to be sent. To transmit

a message to all the ships in the radio coverage area, check To All checkbox.

To transmit a message to a certain ship, use one of the three procedures:

Check To target with MMSI checkbox and enter the MMSI of the
addressee in the input line which will be activated.

Check To target with MMSI checkbox and press button to the right of the
input line. Position the acquisition marker, which will appear

on the Chart panel, on the target, which is the addressee of the message.
Press the left trackball/mouse button. The input line will display
the MMSI of the specified target.

3. To send a reply message, press Reply button in Receive Message group.

With the use of Reply function, Send message window opens up for a
message, which has the same type as the message received from an AIS
object, “Safety Text” in this case. The input line will automatically display
MMSI of the AIS object, which the message has been received from.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

AIS

Use the text input window in Send Message group to enter the text of the
message, which should be sent.

Press Send button.

Select the message despatch channel (Auto is recommended).

The compiled message will be sent.

Press Close button.

Check the sent message status in the table in Send message group. The
message status may be one of the following:

Waiting – the message has been transmitted by the NS 4000 MFD,

but no confirmation of its relay has been received from the transponder;
Sent – the message has been sent by the transponder, but no
confirmation of its delivery to the addressee has been received or
confirmation is not expected if the message was sent to all the AIS
objects (“All” identifier);

Delivered – the message has been delivered to the addressee;

Failed – the message, for some reasons, cannot be sent by the transponder.

The text of sent “Safety Text” messages, as well as their status (except “Waiting”)

is recorded in the ship’s electronic logbook.

Reception of Messages in AIS System

ATTENTION!

The default setting implies generation of AIS message warning upon the
receipt of messages from AIS objects.

As the warning is acknowledged by the operator, the received messages

is shown on “AIS Messages” display of the Control panel and in Receive
message group

on “Messaging” page of “AIS” panel.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 259
AIS

In the list, which will open up, select AIS Messages line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

In “AIS Messages” display, which will open up, read the received message.

Use buttons to view the received messages.

ATTENTION!

Control buttons in “AIS Messages” display of the Control panel and in Receive
Message group on “Messaging” page of “AIS” panel are synchronised.

Open “AIS” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the left-hand part of “AIS” panel to switch to “Messaging” page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

AIS

In Receive message group, read the received message. Use buttons

to view the received messages.

AIS message alarm checkbox is checked by default, arrival of a message,

therefore, triggers off AIS Message warning. Uncheck this checkbox to
disable the warning generation upon the receipt of AIS messages.

Show new message checkbox is checked by default; upon the receipt of a new
message it will, therefore, be shown in “AIS Messages” display of the
Control panel and in Receive group on “Messaging” page of “AIS” panel.
Uncheck this Show new message checkbox to save an image of the viewed
message upon the receipt of

a new message.

Turn on the display of AIS targets (see paragraph Handling AIS Targets).

AIS targets will appear on the Chart panel.

To display the message sender target, press Show Sender button.

The target will be shown in the centre of the Chart panel,
highlighted with a flashing circle.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 261
AIS

Requesting Information from AIS Objects

Open “AIS” panel by selecting the relevant line of TASKS LIST menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “AIS” panel to switch to “Interrogation” page.

To send an inquiry, enter MMSI of the interrogated AIS object by

using one of the two procedures:

enter MMSI in the input line;

press button to the right of the input line. Position the acquisition
marker, which will appear in the Chart panel, on the interrogated AIS
object.

Press the left trackball (mouse) button: the input line will display
MMSI of the AIS object.

Check checkboxes to the left of the required information types (not more than three).

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

AIS

ATTENTION!

As the MMSI is entered with the use of the acquisition marker, the NS 4000
MFD automatically determines the type of the AIS object from the available
data and allows the setting of an inquiry for that information only which can
be received from an object of this type.

Use Timeout in input box to set the time of waiting for the reply to the
inquiry (from 5 to 120 seconds).

Press Interrogate button to send the inquire.

Check the sent inquiry status in Status line. The inquiry status may
be one of the following:

Waiting – the inquiry has been transmitted by the NS 4000 MFD,

but no confirmation of its relay has been received from the
transponder;

Failed – the inquiry has not been sent by the transponder;

Sent – the inquiry has been sent by the transponder, but information from

the interrogated AIS object has not been received, or has not been received in full;

Delivered – all the information requested from the AIS system object has
been received;
Timeout – the set time of waiting for the reply to the inquiry is over, but
information from the interrogated AIS object has not been received, or
has not been received in full.

After the reception of the requested information or the end of the

waiting time, press “OK” button.

The received information can be read off in the target data card.

Replying to an Inquiry with the Use of Long

Range Communication Facilities

Open “AIS” panel by selecting the relevant line in TASKS LIST menu on the Control panel.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 263
AIS

Use the tab in the top part of “AIS” panel to switch to “Long Range” page.

Setting Parameters of Reply to Long Range Inquiry

Checkboxes to the left of the information types permitted for a reply to a

Long Range inquiry, and the reply mode are checked by default. For the
editing of these parameters, press Edit button.
Uncheck checkboxes for that information which will not be sent in a reply to the inquiry.

From Replay mode drop-down list, select the mode of a reply to a Long Range
inquiry. If Auto is selected, the reply is sent automatically and contains only
that requested information, which is allowed by the operator.

Press Apply button to apply the settings you have made.

Long Range Alarm checkbox is checked by default, this is why an alarm is

generated by the reception of a Long Range inquiry. To disable the alarm
generation, uncheck the checkbox.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

AIS

Manual Reply to Long Range Inquiry

As a manual reply to a Long Range inquiry is set, Reply button is activated.

Press Reply button for a manual reply to an inquiry. The reply is sent and
contains only that requested information, which is allowed by the
operator.

Deleting of Long Range Inquiry

Use the cursor to select from the table the inquiry you wish to delete.
Press Delete button. The inquiry will be deleted.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 265
Handling Targets

HANDLING TARGETS

Setting of Safety Parameters in the Tracking of Targets

Open “Targets” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
In the top of “Targets” panel, which will open up, turn on the display of
targets from the required sources by pressing the appropriate buttons:
ARPA, AIS.

Warning group contains windows for enter values of CPA/TCPA.

The CPA/TCPA alarm generation is turning on when both CPA and

TCPA values of the target are smaller than the set values:

CPA – to enter the minimum closest point of approach distance;

TCPA – to enter the minimum time to the closest point of approach.

Handling Target Table

Open “Targets” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Targets

Target Table contains columns (ARPA, AIS and Seetrac targets) and rows with the
targets information with availability of sorting by the relevant parameter:

Name – target identifier;

Alias – target identifier (up to 8 characters) assigned by the operator (the

target is displayed on the Chart panel with this identifier regardless of
settings
in AIS Target Identification group);

CPA – closest point of approach distance;

TCPA – time to the closest point of approach;

COG – target course over the ground;

SOG – target speed over the ground;

Range – distance to the target;

Bearing – bearing to the target;

Bow X – distance to the point where the target crosses the own ship course;

TBow X – time to the point where the target crosses the own ship course.

Prompt Target Search

Open “Targets” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.
Turn on the display of targets (see section AIS, paragraph Handling AIS
Targets, and section ARPA, paragraph Target Display).

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 267
Handling Targets

Press the button with the target identifier in Name line of the Targets Table, e.g. “51”.

The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel
highlighted with a flashing circle.

Turning On Mode of Associating AIS and ARPA Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select TARGETS line and press the left
trackball/mouse button.

Select from the Priority drop-down list the targets which will be
displayed after the association on the ECDIS task screen.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Targets

Press the Association button.

If association conditions are fulfill, the ARPA target continues to be

tracked but is not displayed on the PPI any more.

The data card of such AIS target displays bearing and distance to its
associated ARPA target in the bottom line.

If association conditions exceeds the set limits, the ARPA target is

automatically displayed on the screen.
Turning On DR Mode for AIS Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 269
Handling Targets

In the list, which will open up, select TARGETS line and press the left
trackball/mouse button. Open “AIS” page.

In the input line to the right of the DR for AIS tgts button, set the minimum
speed of AIS targets for the DR mode.

To turn on the DR mode for AIS targets whose speed is equal to and
higher than the set value, press the DR for AIS tgts button.
Filtering Lost Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select TARGETS line and press the left
trackball/mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Targets

Open “Acquisition” page. In the Lost targets group, check the Lost target filter checkbox.

Use the Range input box in the Lost targets group to set the distance beyond
which the Lost Target alarm will not be generated when the ARPA or AIS
looses a target, lost targets are not at all displayed on the ECDIS task
screen any more.

WARNING!

It is advisable to keep the filter in the OFF condition (the Lost target filter
checkbox is unchecked).

Filtering AIS Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select TARGETS line and press the left
trackball/mouse button.

Open the “AIS” page.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 271
Handling Targets

Use the Range filter input box to set the distance beyond which the AIS
targets will not be displayed. Beyond the set range sleeping targets are
filtered for display by default. In the Active AIS targets group, check the Filter
checkbox. Active AIS targets will be filtered too. By default, the AIS filter is
turned off.

Press the AIS filter button and select the filter operation criterion:
OFF – filter is off;

by RANGE– to filter targets beyond the user set limits;

by CPA – to filter targets whose CPA is larger than the value set by the
user in the “Targets” panel;

by TCPA – to filter targets whose TCPA is larger than the value set by the
user in the “Targets” panel.

The indicator to the left of the AIS filter button shows which AIS targets are
currently being filtered:

S – sleeping AIS targets;

A – active AIS target.

WARNING!

It should be noted that dangerous AIS targets can also be filtered off for
display with the aid of the AIS filter. Nevertheless the CPA/TCPA alarm will
be generated for them.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Handling Targets

Sleeping AIS Targets Handling

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select TARGETS line and press the left
trackball/mouse button.

Open the “AIS” page.

Auto activation of sleeping targets if they become dangerous is turned on
by default (the CPA/TCPA auto activation button is on). As this occurs, the
CPA/TCPA alarm is generated.

To turn off the auto activation of sleeping targets as they become

dangerous, set zero values for the CPA and TCPA on the “Targets”
panel.

Deselect CPA/TCPA auto activation button, and then select CPA/TCPA alarm button.

Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 273
Handling Targets

Set the necessary safety CPA/TCPA parameters on the “Targets” panel again.

In this case, as a sleeping AIS target becomes dangerous, the CPA/TCPA

alarm only will be generated, without activation of the target.

To turn off generation of the CPA/TCPA alarm for sleeping AIS targets,
deselect CPA/TCPA alarm button.

In this case, if the sleeping AIS target becomes dangerous, it will be

activated, but no CPA/TCPA alarm will be generated for it.

Obtaining Information on Target

Turn on the display of targets (see section AIS, paragraph Handling AIS
Targets, and section ARPA, paragraph Target Display).

Position free View cursor on the necessary target; the cursor will change
its form. Press the left trackball/mouse button: the target data card with
its parameters will be displayed next to the target:
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
CHAPTER 11

Obtaining of Information
in the ECDIS Task
This chapter describes the procedure used in the
reception of all kinds of information in the ECDIS
task.
Copyright Transas Ltd., 2009
Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON VECTOR CHART OBJECTS

Obtaining Information on Point Type Objects

Set the display of the required area by using scaling and Review
functions. Press button on the Control panel: “Info” panel will open up
in the bottom part of the screen.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the object which
information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display (under the chart name)

the list of pages with available information on the objects, which fall within

the acquisition marker outline:

Select the necessary notation by positioning the cursor on the name
and press the left trackball/mouse button: “Info” panel will open a page
with information on the selected objects:

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 277

Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects

Obtaining Information on Line and Area Type Objects

Set the display of the required area by using scaling and Review
functions. Press button on the Control panel. “Info” panel will open up
in the bottom part of the screen.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the boundary of an area type
object or any part of a line type object which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display (under the chart name)

the list of pages with available information on the objects, which fall within

the acquisition marker outline.

Select the necessary notation by positioning the cursor on the name

and press the left trackball/mouse button: “Info” panel will open a page
with information on the selected objects.
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual
Obtaining Information on Vector Charts

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON VECTOR CHARTS

Set the display of the required area by using scaling and Review
functions. Press button on the Control panel. “Info” panel will open up
in the bottom part of the screen.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on point of the

chart which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display (under the chart name)

the list of pages with available information on the objects which fall within

the acquisition marker outline.

Select General Chart Information notation by positioning the cursor on it, and press the left
trackball/mouse button. The page with information on the vector chart will open up.
Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 279
Obtaining Information on Updating Objects

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON UPDATING OBJECTS

Set the display of the required area by using scaling and Review
functions. Press button on the Control panel. “Info” panel will open up
in the bottom part of the screen.

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the updating

object which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display (above the
chart name) the list of pages with available information on the updating
objects and navigation chart which fall within the acquisition marker outline.
Select Manual correction by positioning the cursor on this notation and press
the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display the page with
information

on the categories of updating objects, which fall within the acquisition marker outline.

Select the required object category by positioning the cursor on it and

press the left trackball/mouse button. The window will display the page with
information on the objects of this category.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on User Chart Objects

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON USER CHART OBJECTS

Set the display of the required area by using scaling and Review
functions. Press button on the Control panel. “Info” panel will open up
in the bottom part of the screen.

ATTENTION!

Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Position the acquisition marker, which will appear, on the user chart
object which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display (above
the chart name) the list of pages with available information on the user
chart objects and navigation chart, which fall within the acquisition
marker outline.
Select User charts layer A (B) by positioning the cursor on this notation and
press the left trackball/mouse button. “Info” panel will display the page
with information

on the categories of user chart objects which fall within the acquisition marker outline.

Select the required object category by positioning the cursor on it and

press the left trackball/mouse button. The window will display the page with
information on the objects of this category.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 281

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON TIDES AND CURRENTS

Obtaining Information on the Change of Tidal Heights

Open “Tasks” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Tasks” panel to switch to “Tides” page.
Use the tab in the top right part of “Tides” page, which will open up,
to switch to “Place” tab.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In the right-hand part of “Place” tab, which will open up, select the
reference point by using one of the following procedures:

enter the reference point name in By name input line and press <Enter> key;

check All Places checkbox.

In the list in the left-hand part of the page, which will open up, select
the reference point and double click the left trackball/mouse button.

check By cursor checkbox; enter the radius of the area coverage

circle in Distance input line, which will open up.

Press Find button. Position the graphic cursor, which will appear, on the
point within the Chart panel which will be the centre of the area coverage
circle.
Press the left trackball/mouse button. In the list of reference points, which
fall within the coverage area in the left-hand part of the page, select the
reference point and double click the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 283

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Information Displayed Graphically

After the selection of the reference point, “Diagram” tab will open up,
displaying the tidal curve for the selected reference point.

In Date line of “Diagram” tab select the date starting from which the tidal
heights will be calculated. Use Period input line to enter the period which
tidal heights are required to be calculated for.

The following paramrters can be set:

UKC – under keel clearance;

Draught – ship’s draught;

Min. Chart depth – the minimum depth on the chart.

Сheck Marks checkbox to show the time marks on the diagram.

On the graph, blue is used for showing the time periods when the actual
depth is safe, and red for showing the time intervals with dangerous
depths.
Check Cursor Data checkbox. Position the cursor on the tidal curve and by
moving the cursor with the trackball/mouse, set the necessary time value
in the cursor information window.

Read the tidal height value in the cursor information window.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Information Displayed in a Tabular Form

After the selection of the reference point, “Diagram” tab will open up
displaying the tidal curve for the selected reference point.

Use the tab in the top right part of the page to switch to “Table” tab.
In Date line of “Table” tab select the date starting from which the tidal
heights will be calculated. Use Period input line to enter the period which
tidal heights are required to be calculated for.

To calculate tidal tables, use one of the following procedures:

In Table Properties group, check Show high/low water checkbox.

The left-hand part of the page will display a table of high and low water.

In Table Properties group, check Time step checkbox; press button

in the activated line for the input of the tidal height calculations discretion.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 285

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In the list, which will open up, select the necessary tidal height calculation
discretion and press the left trackball/mouse button. The left-hand part of the
page will display the tidal height table calculated with the set discretion.

Take the necessary readings in the calculated tables.

Display of Tidal Heights on the Chart Panel

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select Environment Data line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

In “Environment Data” display, which will open up, check Tides checkbox.
The Chart panel displays tidal heights in the reference points as of the
current time.

Press Show place button in the top right part of “Tides” page on “Tasks” panel.

The selected reference point is displayed in the centre of the Chart panel.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Obtaining Information on Tidal Currents

Set the display of the area within the chart screen boundary by using
scaling and Review functions.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select Environment Data line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 287

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In “Environment Data” display, which will open up, check Tidal currents checkbox.

The Chart panel displays tidal current vectors as of the current time.

Check Currents velocity values checkbox. The Chart panel will display
digitally the values of tidal current speed.

Obtaining Information on Surface Currents

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select Environment Data line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In “Environment Data” display, which will open up, check Surface currents checkbox.

The Chart panel displays surface currents vectors as of the current time.

Check Currents velocity values checkbox. The Chart panel will display
digitally the values of surface current speed.

Use of Animation

Set the display of the area within the chart screen boundaries by using
scaling and Review functions.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.
In the list, which will open up, select Environment Data line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 289

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In “Environment Data” display, check the checkboxes of the parameters

whose value change dynamics is required to be viewed. Press the activated
Animate button to the right of the names of parameters.

In Date and Ship time input lines of “Animate” window, which will open
up, enter the required viewing start date and time.
Use Step input line to enter the discretion of the parameter value change.

View the changes in the parameter values by using buttons.

On the Chart panel, the selected parameters will change with the set discretion.

For the automatic change of parameters with the set discretion, press Auto button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Current System Information

OBTAINING CURRENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select System Information line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
“System Information” display is intended for presenting the following data:

Drift – drift direction and speed;

Current – summary value of the surface and tidal currents

calculated for the current time at the current ship position;

Sf. contour – current safety contour value determined by the ECDIS task;
when the safety contour is changed automatically, its value is
displayed in red colour until the associated alarm message is
acknowledged;

True wind – true wind direction and speed (from the wind sensor data);

Rel. wind – relative wind direction and speed (from the wind sensor data);

Water t – water temperature value from the temperature sensor data;

DPTH – value of water depth under the keel (from the sounder data);

Tide height – expected tidal height value calculated for the current
time at the reference point closest to the ship position, and the
name of this reference point.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 291

Obtaining Current System Information

To select the true wind vector display mode on the ECDIS task
screen, open the “Monitoring” panel by selecting the appropriate item
of the TASKS LIST menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Monitoring” panel, which will open up,
to switch to the “Route Monitoring” page.

Press the Wind vector button:

Select the necessary display mode (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, section

Other Sensors, paragraph Wind Interface).

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Ports

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON PORTS

Open “Tasks” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Tasks” panel to switch to “Ports” page:

To obtain information on the required port, use the following procedure.

Obtaining Information by Port Name

Press Port button. Type the first letters of port name or select the port
from list by the cursor.

Press left trackball button or <Enter> key. The information on the

selected port will be displayed on the page.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 293

Obtaining Information on Ports

Read the necessary information (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section Ports). For

obtaining information on other port, press Reset button and repeat procedure.

Obtaining Information by the Region Name

Press Region button. Type the first letters of required region or select it
from list by the cursor.
Press left trackball button or <Enter> key. Press Port button. In this case,
the list displays ports belonging to selected region. Type the first letters
of port name or select the port from list by the cursor.

Press left trackball button or <Enter> key. The information on the

selected port will be displayed on the page.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Ports

Read the necessary information (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section Ports). For

obtaining information on other port, press Reset button and repeat procedure.

Obtaining Information by the Country Name

Press Country button. Type the first letters of required country or select it
from list by the cursor.
Press left trackball button or <Enter> key. Press Port button. In this case,
the list displays ports belonging to selected country. Type the first letters
of port name or select the port from list by the cursor.

Press left trackball button or <Enter> key. The information on the

selected port will be displayed on the page.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 295

Obtaining Information on Ports

Read the necessary information (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section Ports).

For obtaining information on other port, press Reset button and repeat procedure.

Obtaining Information by the Cursor Position on the Chart Panel

Press Select Area button. Position the graphic cursor, which will appear, in
the corner of the required chart area.
Press the left trackball button. Select the required chart fragment by
moving the cursor with the trackball.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Ports

Press the left trackball button to exit from the graphic cursor mode. Press
Port button. In this case, the list displays ports belonging to selected area.
Type the first letters of port name or select the port from list by the cursor.
Press left trackball button or <Enter> key. The information on the
selected port will be displayed on the page.

Read the necessary information (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS

(V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section Ports).

For obtaining information on other port, press Reset button and repeat procedure.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 297

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Quick Search for Selected Port

Select the necessary port as described above. Press Highlight button.

The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel
highlighted with a flashing circle.

OBTAINING NAVTEX INFORMATION

Open the “NavTex Viewer” panel by selecting the appropriate item of the
TASKS LIST menu on the Control panel.
See document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section NAVTEX Messages.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Work with NAVTEX Message Database

NAVTEX messages from the database are shown in the Message

Table, filter settings taken into account.

The Message Table contains the following message parameters fields:

! – “Danger” message attribute or empty field (set automatically on the

messages containing coordinates);

Date/Time – message reception date/time (UTC from NS 4000 MFD);

Stn – station type (identifiers are taken from the message);

Subj – message subject (identifiers are taken from the message);

Freq – frequency (kHz) which the message was received on (for the
NMEA NAVTEX only);

Serial Num. – message number from the NAVTEX message;

Text – the first two lines of a NAVTEX message;

Err. Rate – message reception error transmitted by the NAVTEX receiver for
NMEA NAVTEX or calculated by NS 4000 MFD for ASCII NAVTEX;
Status – message status (“Protected” or empty field).

For the message sorting by one of parameters, press the appropriate

button with the column name in the Message Table (see document
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section NAVTEX Messages).

To turn on the filter, press the ON button in the Filter row:

To make the filter settings, press the Stations button. The All checkbox is
checked by default, and the Message Table shows messages from all the
stations. Check

the checkboxes of stations, whose messages should be displayed in the

Message Table. The Message Table will display NAVTEX messages from
the specified stations regardless of the NAVAREA area:

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 299

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Use a similar procedure to make settings for messages filtration by the

following parameters:

Subject – if message subjects from the offered list are checked, messages

with these subjects are displayed. In this case, it is impossible to turn off displays
with message subjects A, B, D and L (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section

NAVTEX Messages, paragraph NAVTEX Messages Database);

Max error rate – messages whose reception error rate exceeds the set value

are not displayed. Setting of the maximum error rate at 100% means the
display of all the messages.

The Message Table will display messages to match all the three settings

(see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, section NAVTEX Messages).

To update the NAVTEX message database, press the Update Database button.

Note: The database is updated automatically at a rate (5 to 60 minutes) set in the System
Configuration utility at the time of installation (see NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100

ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE).

Press Navtex Out Monitor to receive messages from the NAVTEX receiver
without taking into account the filter set in the receiver.

ATTENTION!

The Navtex Out Monitor button should always be depressed. As filter settings
are changed in the NAVTEX receiver, the button will be released, and it is
necessary to press it again.

To delete one or several messages from the database, select them with
the cursor in the Message Table. To select several messages required to
be deleted, select them keeping <Ctrl> key depressed. To select several
messages in a row, specify the first and the last message keeping <Shift>
key depressed.

Press the Delete button: messages will be deleted.

To delete messages received before some certain moment of time, position

the cursor in the input window to the right of the Delete till button and make a
double click on the left trackball button.

Set the required value by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard.

Press the right trackball button and select “Apply”.

Press the “Yes” button to confirm the deleting of messages.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Messages will be deleted.

Note: If a message has the “Protected” status, the Delete button will be
inactive, and you will not be able to delete the message from the
database. When several messages are deleted, messages with
the “Protected” status will not be deleted.

To print out one or several messages from the database, select them with
the cursor in the Message Table in the manner specified above, and press
the Print button.

Work with Messages

To work with messages, use the bottom part of the “NavTex Viewer” panel. Use
the cursor to select the necessary message in the Message Table, the text of the
message will be shown in the bottom part of the “NavTex Viewer” panel.

Setting NAVTEX Message Status and Attributes

Check the Examined checkbox to change the message

status to “Examined”. This means that the user has read
the NAVTEX message. NAVTEX message symbols from
a message with

the “Examined” status will be displayed on the ECDIS task

screen in the following from: .

Check the Protected checkbox to change the message status

to “Protected”. This means that the user will not be able to

delete this NAVTEX message.

The “Danger” attribute is set by default if there is at least

one pair of valid coordinates in the NAVTEX message.

Check the Polygon checkbox to set the “Polygon” attribute.

This is only possible for the messages in which more than
one pair of valid coordinates is available.

After making all the settings, press the activating Apply button (see document

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,

Chapter 7, section NAVTEX Messages).

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 301

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Editing Coordinates in NAVTEX Message

Position the cursor on the coordinates which should be edited, in the

right bottom box of the “NavTex Viewer” panel and make a double
click on the left trackball button.

Set the required value by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard.

Press the right trackball button and select “Apply”.

Press the left trackball button again: the edited value will be set. The
coordinate value in the window is shown in italic indicating that the field
has been edited by the user.
To add a new NAVTEX message symbol, position the cursor on the symbol
coordinates, which will be followed by the new symbol coordinates in the
table (this is important for the subsequent setting of the “Polygon”
attribute) and press the left trackball button. Press the Add button. A new
line containing the same coordinates as the old ones will be displayed.

Edit the coordinates as described above. The new coordinate values

in the window are shown in italic indicating that the field has been
edited by the user.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

To delete a NAVTEX message symbol, position the cursor on its

coordinates and press the left trackball button.

Press Delete button.

The NAVTEX message symbol coordinates will be deleted from the table.

After making the changes, press the Apply button which will be activated.

Fast Search for NAVTEX Message Symbol on the Chart Panel

Position the cursor on the coordinates of the NAVTEX message

symbol which should be found and press the left trackball button.
Press Highlight button.

The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel,
highlighted with a flashing circle.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 303

Obtaining Information on Own Ship AIS Data

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON OWN SHIP AIS DATA

Press the button with the name of the set display in the “Display Panel”
window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up, select AIS VDL Data line and press
the left trackball/mouse button.
“AIS VDL Data” display is intended for the display of data broadcast by the transponder.

The display contains the following data:

Source – current positioning system used by the transponder: Internal

Int or External Ext (D-GPS); the display of the positioning system
indicator
in the green colour means that the RAIM (Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring) GNSS receiver is in use;

UTC – UTC synchronising status in the AIS transponder; it is determined

strictly by the Internal GPS;

Latitude – latitude value supplied by the positioning system used by the transponder;

Longitude – longitude value supplied by the positioning system

used by the transponder;

COG – value of course over the ground supplied by the positioning system
used by the transponder;

SOG – value of speed over the ground supplied by the positioning system
used by the transponder;

HDG – heading value supplied to the transponder by the

course detection (gyro) system;

ROT – values of direction and rate of turn supplied to the

transponder by the Rate-of-Turn sensor.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Currently Licence

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON CURRENTLY LICENCE

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “Licence Info” page.
“License Info” page is intended for the display of data on the NS 4000 MFD
software product license and the functions allowed to be used (licensed).
This page also specifies the installed NS 4000 MFD version. For update
licence see document NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009).
UTILITIES, Chapter 9.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 305

Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

OBTAINING INFORMATION ON INPUT/OUTPUT MESSAGES

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST

menu on the Control panel.

Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to
switch to “COM Trace” page.

This page is intended for displaying and recording of the IEC 61162-1, 61993-2, and
proprietary (e.g. for ES4/ES3) formats and similar text messages/sentences
provided to the NS 4000 MFD from the external sensors and displaying of the
sentences transmitted by the NS 4000 MFD to the external devices.
The page contains the following elements:

Connected sensors – group of buttons corresponding to the external

devices connected via the System Configuration utility (see
document
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). INSTALLATION GUIDE,

Chapter 2, section NS 4000 Configuration, paragraph Sensors

Settings); the buttons allow selection of a sensor or external device,
which the exchange of messages with is shown on the data display
window;

Port – group of indicators of the NS 4000 MFD COM ports, which the
sensors and external devices are connected to;

Clear trace – to clear display window;

Input filter – to turn on the display of messages supplied to the NS 4000

MFD from the external sensors;

Output filter – to turn on the display of messages transmitted by the NS 4000

MFD to the external devices;

Record COM trace – recording of the message stream from all the WS COM
ports to comtrace._____ file;

Data display window:

– Sensor – direction and source of the message stream;

– Data – messages.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

Display of Data Flow Between the NS 4000

MFD and Different External Devices

To display the traffic between the NS 4000 MFD and the necessary external device,
press the button with the name of this device in the Connected sensors column.

The data flow will be shown in the Trace window. The Input filter and Output filter
checkboxes are turned on by default, so the Trace window shows the flow of
both incoming and outgoing NS 4000 MFD data. To display the data flow in
one direction only, turn off the pertinent filter.

Note: You can simultaneously monitor the data flow from several external
devices by pressing the appropriate buttons.

To clear the Trace window, press the Clear trace button.

COM Trace Record

ATTENTION!

For each WS, a comtrace._____ file can be recorded for the COM ports of this

WS only.
Press the Record COM trace button.

In the “COM Trace” window which will open up, the Ports list column contains all
the connected COM ports of the WS in question. Next to the port which the
message stream should be recorded to comtrace._____ file for, press

the button in the Map to column.

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task 307

Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

From the pull-down list, select the virtual VIRTX port for the given COM port.

Note: For each COM port, an individual VIRT port should be selected.

For each COM port which the comtrace._____ file will be recorded for (e.g. COM1,

COM5 and COM8), set the corresponding virtual port (VIRT1, VIRT2 and VIRT3).

In the Ports list column, press the buttons with the names of the ports which the
comtrace._____ file will be recorded for, the data flow will be shown

in the data display window. Press the Start record button.

The comtrace._____ file recording will be made from all the turned on COM ports

during the time specified in the Duration window (30 minutes by default). If it is
necessary to interrupt the recording, press the Start record button again. After
the end of the recording, the Start record button will be automatically disabled.

For the further use, copy the comtrace._____ file from the C:\Transas\ComTrace.FA

directory onto the external carrier by using the Data Tool utility (see document
NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (V. 2.00.009). UTILITIES, Chapter 3,

section Software Description, paragraph Data Tool Utility Window

under Internal Group).

Note: When a new comtrace._____ file is recorded, the old file

in the C:\Transas\ComTrace.FA directory will be rewritten.

To cleat the data display window, press the Clear button.

To close the COM Trace window, press the Close button.

For additional settings of the comtrace._____ file recording, press the Settings button.

NAVI-SAILOR 4000/4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00.009). User Manual

Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

Press the “OK” button.

Note: With the use of the password by the service engineer, more advanced
settings of the comtrace._____ file recording can be made, normally

unavailable to the ordinary user remaining grayed.

Press the “OK” button.

To record the file direct to onto the external carrier, press the Writing To Folder
button and specify the path to the external carrier.

To display the buttons for turning on the filter for the input/output
messages when recording the comtrace._____ file, in the
“Options” window check

the Show Input/Output Checkboxes.

In the Set duration input window, set the duration of recording the comtrace._____

file (not more than 30 min).

Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task
309